S-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 2608 13 Part no. 222 584 29 05 Edition C 2016

É2225842905sËÍ2225842905

S-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RBurmester® is a registered trademark ofBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells youwhere you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

As at 26.03.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp:

Apple® iOS

Android™Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2225842905 É2225842905sËÍ

Index ....................................................... 3

Introduction ......................................... 24

At a glance ........................................... 32

Safety ................................................... 42

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 104

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 130

Climate control ................................. 140

Driving and parking .......................... 161

On-board computer and displays .... 256

Stowage and features ...................... 325

Maintenance and care ...................... 352

Breakdown assistance ..................... 367

Wheels and tires ............................... 384

Technical data ................................... 425

2 Contents

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 21312 V socket

see Sockets115 V socket ...................................... 337360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 363Function/notes ............................. 224

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 278Function/notes ................................ 68Warning lamp ................................. 316

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 146Activating/deactivating NightView Assist Plus

With spotlight function ................... 232Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 271Display message ............................ 301Function/information .................... 234

Active Body Control (ABC)Display message ............................ 300Function/notes ............................. 210

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 271Display message ............................ 301Function/information .................... 237

Active multicontour seat .................. 117Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 217Display message ............................ 302Exiting a parking space .................. 219Function/notes ............................. 216Important safety notes .................. 216

Parking .......................................... 218ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 72Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 212Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Display message ............................ 293Function/notes ............................. 133Switching on/off ........................... 133

Additional speedometer ................... 274Additives (engine oil) ........................ 430Air bags

Belt bags .......................................... 48Cushion air bags .............................. 53Deployment ..................................... 57Display message ............................ 289Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 52Important safety notes .................... 50Introduction ..................................... 50Knee bag .......................................... 52Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 53PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 46Side impact air bag .......................... 52Window curtain air bag .................... 53

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 159Important safety notes .................. 158Rear ............................................... 160Setting ........................................... 158Setting the center air vents ........... 159Setting the side air vents ............... 159

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 299Function/notes ............................. 212

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78Switching off (ATA) .......................... 78Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 78

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Index 3

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

ArmrestStowage compartment .................. 327

Ashtray ............................................... 334Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 268Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 269ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 358Hiding a service message .............. 358Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 358Service message ............................ 357Special service requirements ......... 358

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 78Function ........................................... 78Switching off the alarm .................... 78

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 271Display message ............................ 299Function/notes ............................. 228

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 293see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 359Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 167Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 166Automatic headlamp mode .............. 130Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 173Automatic drive program ............... 174Changing gear ............................... 173DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 170Display message ............................ 308Driving tips .................................... 173Emergency running mode .............. 177Engaging drive position .................. 171Engaging neutral ............................ 171

Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 170Engaging reverse gear ................... 171Engaging the park position ............ 170Kickdown ....................................... 173Manual drive program .................... 174Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................................ 175Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 275Overview ........................................ 170Problem (malfunction) ................... 177Program selector button ................ 173Pulling away ................................... 165Starting the engine ........................ 164Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 174Transmission position display ........ 172Transmission positions .................. 172

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 177

BBAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 69BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 69BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Important safety notes .................... 69Battery (high-voltage)

see High-voltage batteryBattery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 82Important safety notes .................... 82Replacing ......................................... 82

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 374Display message ............................ 295Important safety notes .................. 372Jump starting ................................. 376

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt bag ................................................ 48Blind Spot Assist

see Active Blind Spot Assist

4 Index

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 283Notes ............................................. 430

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 291

Brake pedalPedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 44

BrakesABS .................................................. 68Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72BAS .................................................. 69BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 69Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 430Display message ............................ 278EBD .................................................. 75High-performance brake system .... 196Hill start assist ............................... 165HOLD function ............................... 208Important safety notes .................. 194Maintenance .................................. 195Parking brake ................................ 190RBS warning lamp .......................... 315Recuperative Brake System ............. 44Riding tips ...................................... 194Warning lamp ................................. 315

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 367see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 35Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 257

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 25

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Camerasee 360° camera

see Rear view cameraCar

see VehicleCare

360° camera ................................. 363Car wash ........................................ 359Carpets .......................................... 366Display ........................................... 364Exhaust pipe .................................. 363Exterior lights ................................ 362Gear or selector lever .................... 365General notes ................................ 359Interior ........................................... 364Matte finish ................................... 361Night View Assist Plus ................... 364Paint .............................................. 361Plastic trim .................................... 364Power washer ................................ 360Rear view camera .......................... 363Roof lining ...................................... 366Seat belt ........................................ 366Seat cover ..................................... 365Sensors ......................................... 362Steering wheel ............................... 365Trim pieces .................................... 365Washing by hand ........................... 360Wheels ........................................... 361Windows ........................................ 362Wiper blades .................................. 362Wooden trim .................................. 365

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 266Center console

Overview .......................................... 37Stowage space .............................. 326

Center console in the rear com-partment

Stowage compartment .................. 327Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 79Changing the media source ............. 265Charging

see Charging the high-voltage bat-tery (important safety notes)

Charging cableConnecting .................................... 185Controls ......................................... 183Important safety notes .................. 183Indicator lamp ................................ 184

Index 5

Removing ....................................... 185Storing ........................................... 183Warming up ................................... 182

Charging the high-voltage battery(important safety notes) ................... 180Chauffeur mode

Display message ............................ 310Fully reclined position .................... 114General notes ................................ 111Installing the head restraint ........... 113Moving front-passenger seat intothe chauffeur position .................... 112Moving the front-passenger seatinto the normal position ................. 113Removing the head restraint .......... 113

ChildRestraint system .............................. 62

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 66LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 63On the front-passenger seat ............ 65Rearward-facing restraint system .... 66Top Tether ....................................... 64

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 66Rear doors ....................................... 67

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 62

Cigarette lighter ................................ 335Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 362Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 141Controlling automatically ............... 147Cooling with air dehumidification .. 146Defrosting the windows ................. 151Defrosting the windshield .............. 151ECO start/stop function ................ 145General notes ................................ 140Immediate pre-entry climate con-trol ................................................. 158Indicator lamp ................................ 147Ionization ....................................... 155Notes on using the automatic cli-mate control .................................. 145Overview of systems ...................... 140Perfume atomizer .......................... 153

Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time ............................... 157Pre-entry climate control via key ... 155Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 152Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 147Rear control panel ......................... 141Refrigerant ..................................... 432Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 432Setting the air distribution ............. 149Setting the air vents ...................... 158Setting the airflow ......................... 150Setting the climate mode ............... 148Setting the temperature ................ 148Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 152Switching on/off ........................... 145Switching residual heat on/off ...... 152Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 151Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off ........................ 150

Climate control systemClimate control .............................. 145

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 270Display message ............................ 284Operation/notes .............................. 71

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 364

Combination switch .......................... 131Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 262Convenience closing feature .............. 96Convenience opening feature ............ 95Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 356Display message ............................ 294Displaying the temperature (on-board computer) ............................ 269Filling capacity ............................... 431Important safety notes .................. 431Temperature gauge ........................ 257Warning lamp ................................. 320

6 Index

Coolbox .............................................. 339Cooling

see Climate controlCopyright ............................................. 31Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 291Function/notes ............................. 132

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 135Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 210Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 75Cruise control

Calling up the speed last stored .... 198Cruise control lever ....................... 197Deactivating ................................... 199Display message ............................ 305Driving system ............................... 197Function/notes ............................. 197General notes ................................ 197Important safety notes .................. 197Setting a speed .............................. 198Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 198

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 331Important safety notes .................. 330Rear compartment ......................... 331Temperature controlled ................. 332

Cushion air bags .................................. 53Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 29Customer Relations Department ....... 29

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 266Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 293Function/notes ............................. 130Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 274

Declarations of conformity ................. 28Diagnostics connection ...................... 28

Digital speedometer ......................... 263DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 170Display

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messageHybrid drive system ....................... 297

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 357Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 277Driving systems ............................. 299Engine ............................................ 294General notes ................................ 277Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 277Introduction ................................... 277Lights ............................................. 291Safety systems .............................. 278SmartKey ....................................... 312Tires ............................................... 306Vehicle ........................................... 308

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 322Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 71DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 201Activation conditions ..................... 201Cruise control lever ....................... 201Deactivating ................................... 205Display message ............................ 303Displays in the instrument cluster .. 204Driving tips .................................... 205Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 202Function/notes ............................. 199Important safety notes .................. 200Setting a speed .............................. 203Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 204Stopping ........................................ 203with Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot ............................................... 207

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 87Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 79

Index 7

Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 310Emergency locking ........................... 88Emergency unlocking ....................... 87Important safety notes .................... 85Opening (from inside) ...................... 86Power closing .................................. 87

Drinking and driving ......................... 193Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 174Manual ........................................... 174Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 175SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 276

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 358

Driving Assistance package ............. 234Driving on flooded roads .................. 196Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 69BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 69COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 71Distance warning function ............... 71EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 75ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 73Important safety information ........... 68Overview .......................................... 68PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 75Recuperative Brake System ............. 44STEER CONTROL ............................. 77

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 224Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 234Active Body Control ABC ............... 210Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 237Active Parking Assist ..................... 216AIRMATIC ...................................... 212ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 228

Cruise control ................................ 197Display message ............................ 299DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 199DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 207Driving Assistance package ........... 234HOLD function ............................... 208Night View Assist Plus ................... 230PARKTRONIC ................................. 214Rear view camera .......................... 220Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 229

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 196Automatic transmission ................. 173Brakes ........................................... 194Break-in period .............................. 161DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 205Downhill gradient ........................... 194Drinking and driving ....................... 193Driving in winter ............................. 196Driving on flooded roads ................ 196Driving on wet roads ...................... 196Exhaust check ............................... 193Fuel ................................................ 192General .......................................... 192Hydroplaning ................................. 196Icy road surfaces ........................... 196Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 195Snow chains .................................. 386Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 194The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 161Wet road surface ........................... 194

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 267

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 122EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 123Function/notes ............................. 122

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 280Function/notes ................................ 75

8 Index

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 193On-board computer ....................... 262

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 167Automatic engine switch-off .......... 166Deactivating/activating ................. 167General information ....................... 166Important safety notes .................. 166Introduction ................................... 166

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 87Trunk ............................................... 94Vehicle ............................................. 87

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 57

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 25

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 320Display message ............................ 294ECO start/stop function ................ 166Engine number ............................... 427Irregular running ............................ 169Jump-starting ................................. 376Starting (important safety notes) ... 164Starting problems .......................... 169Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 164Starting via smartphone ................ 164Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 164Switching off .................................. 190Switching off with the Start/Stopbutton ............................................ 190Switching off with the vehicle key .. 190Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 381

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 169

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 355Additives ........................................ 430Checking the oil level ..................... 353

Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 353Checking the oil level using theon-board computer ........................ 355Display message ............................ 296Filling capacity ............................... 430General notes ................................ 429Notes about oil grades ................... 429Notes on oil level/consumption .... 353Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 275Viscosity ........................................ 430

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 276Characteristics ................................. 73Deactivating/activating ................. 269Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 74Display message ............................ 278Function/notes ................................ 73General notes .................................. 73Important safety information ........... 73Trailer stabilization ........................... 74Warning lamp ................................. 317

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 73Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust check ................................... 193Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 363Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-age battery) ....................................... 374Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 362see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 123Dipping (automatic) ....................... 124Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 124Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 124Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 124Setting ........................................... 124Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 126Storing the parking position .......... 125

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 326

Index 9

FFeatures ............................................. 330Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 427Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 405MOExtended tires .......................... 368Preparing the vehicle ..................... 367TIREFIT kit ...................................... 369

Floormats ........................................... 350Folding table ...................................... 328Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 425Two-way radio ................................ 425

Front-passenger seatAdjusting from the driver's seat ..... 108Adjusting from the rear compart-ment .............................................. 108

FuelAdditives ........................................ 429Consumption statistics .................. 262Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 261Displaying the range ...................... 261Driving tips .................................... 192Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Grade (gasoline) ............................ 428Important safety notes .................. 428Problem (malfunction) ................... 180Refueling ........................................ 177Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 428

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 261

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 428Problem (malfunction) ................... 180

FusesAllocation chart ..................... 381, 383Before changing ............................. 382Dashboard fuse box ....................... 382Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 383Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 382Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 383Important safety notes .................. 381

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 350General notes ................................ 347Important safety notes .................. 348Opening/closing the garage door .. 350Problems when programming ........ 349Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 348Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 349

Gasoline ............................................. 428Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 275Genuine parts ...................................... 24Glove box ........................................... 326

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 91Hazard warning lamps ...................... 132Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 114Adjusting (manually) ...................... 115Adjusting (rear) .............................. 116EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint ......................................... 115Luxury ............................................ 115Supplementary cushion ................. 116

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 273Displays and operating .................. 259Function/notes ............................. 259Important safety notes .................. 259Selecting displays .......................... 273Setting the position ....................... 273

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 134see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 132High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 133Display message ............................ 292Switching on/off ........................... 132

10 Index

High-voltage batteryBattery care ................................... 182Charging (charging station) ............ 186Charging (mains socket) ................ 183Charging (wallbox) ......................... 185Charging cable warming ................ 182Cruise range .................................. 182Energy consumption ...................... 182General notes .................................. 43Method of operation ...................... 181Outside temperatures .................... 182Overvoltage protection .................. 182Problems with the charging proc-ess ................................................. 187Terms of use .................................. 182Vehicle fire ....................................... 43

Hill start assist .................................. 165HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 209Activation conditions ..................... 209Deactivating ................................... 209Display message ............................ 303Function/notes ............................. 208General notes ................................ 208

HoodClosing ........................................... 353Display message ............................ 310Important safety notes .................. 352Opening ......................................... 352

Horn ...................................................... 32HUD

see Head-up displayHybrid drive system

Automatic switch off ........................ 42Danger of electric shock .................. 42Display message ............................ 297General notes .................................. 42High-voltage battery ........................ 43Important safety notes .................... 42Manual switch off ............................ 42Opening the hood ............................ 43Warning lamp ................................. 315

Hybrid vehiclesImportant safety notes .................... 42

Hydroplaning ..................................... 196

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 78Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 322

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 33Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 256Interior lighting

Control ........................................... 135Emergency lighting ........................ 135Overview ........................................ 134Reading lamp ................................. 134

JJack

Using ............................................. 406Jump starting (engine) ...................... 376

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 162Start/Stop button .......................... 162

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 96Deactivation ..................................... 80Locking ............................................ 80Start function ................................... 81Unlocking ......................................... 80

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 173

Knee bag .............................................. 52

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Index 11

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 63License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 292Light function, active

Display message ............................ 293Light sensor (display message) ....... 293Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 133Automatic headlamp mode ............ 130Cornering light function ................. 132Fogged up headlamps .................... 134General notes ................................ 130Hazard warning lamps ................... 132High beam flasher .......................... 132High-beam headlamps ................... 132Light switch ................................... 130Low-beam headlamps .................... 131Parking lamps ................................ 131Setting exterior lighting ................. 130Standing lamps .............................. 131Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 274Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 274Turn signals ................................... 131see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 325Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 87Emergency locking ........................... 88From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 86

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 291Switching on/off ........................... 131

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 118

Luxury head restraints ..................... 115

MM+S tires ............................................ 386Magic Body Control ........................... 210MAGIC SKY CONTROL ....................... 100Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 361Maximum charge current

Setting (charging cable) ................. 184Setting (on-board computer) .......... 272

MBCsee Magic Body Control

mbraceCall priority .................................... 344Display message ............................ 283Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 344Downloading routes ....................... 347Emergency call .............................. 341General notes ................................ 340Geo fencing ................................... 347Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 346MB info call button ........................ 343Remote fault diagnosis .................. 346Remote vehicle locking .................. 345Roadside Assistance button .......... 342Search & Send ............................... 344Self-test ......................................... 341Speed alert .................................... 347System .......................................... 341Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 347Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 345

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 81General notes .................................. 81Inserting .......................................... 82Locking vehicle ................................ 88Removing ......................................... 81Unlocking the driver's door .............. 87

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 327see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 266Memory function

In the rear compartment ................ 127

12 Index

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 126Storing settings (rear compart-ment) ............................................. 127

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 224ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 68Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 234Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 237Active Parking Assist ..................... 216ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 228BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 69BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 69Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 210Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 75DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 199DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 207ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 73General notes ................................ 197MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 210Night View Assist Plus ................... 230PARKTRONIC ................................. 214PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 59PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 75PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 60Rear view camera .......................... 220ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 211Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 229

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 277Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 362

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 425Installation ..................................... 425Menu (on-board computer) ............ 267Transmission output (maximum) .... 425

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 81MOExtended tires .............................. 368Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 409Mounting a new wheel ................... 409Preparing the vehicle ..................... 406Raising the vehicle ......................... 406Removing a wheel .......................... 408Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 406

MP3Operation ....................................... 266

Multicontour seat .............................. 117Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 258Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer .. 257Overview .......................................... 35

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 263Night View Assist Plus

Activating/deactivating ................. 232Cleaning ......................................... 364Display message ............................ 302Function/notes ............................. 230Pedestrian and animal recogni-tion ................................................ 231Problem (malfunction) ................... 234Switching automatic activationon/off ............................................ 270

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 161

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 57

Index 13

Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 50Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61Children in the vehicle ..................... 61Important safety notes .................... 45Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 44Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 53PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 46Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 59PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 60Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45

OCSConditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 57Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Odometer ........................................... 261Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 275Assistance graphic menu ............... 268Assistance menu ........................... 269Display messages .......................... 277Displaying a service message ........ 358DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 204Factory settings ............................. 275Head-up display ............................. 259HYBRID menu ................................ 272Important safety notes .................. 256Instrument cluster menu ............... 274Lights menu ................................... 274Media menu ................................... 265Menu overview .............................. 261Message memory .......................... 277Navigation menu ............................ 263Operation ....................................... 257Radio menu ................................... 265

Service menu ................................. 269Settings menu ............................... 269Standard display ............................ 261Telephone menu ............................ 267Trip menu ...................................... 261Video DVD operation ..................... 267

Online access to the vehicleData protection .............................. 188Functions ....................................... 189General information ....................... 188Internet .......................................... 189

Opening the fuel filler flap(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ............ 179

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 28Important safety notes .................... 27

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 25Vehicle equipment ........................... 25

Outside temperature display ........... 257Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 67

PPaint code number ............................ 426Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 361Panic alarm .......................................... 44Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 97Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ............................................... 100Operating ......................................... 98Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ........................... 99Problem (malfunction) ................... 103Rain closing feature ......................... 99Resetting ....................................... 102Reversing feature ............................. 98

Parcel net hooks ............................... 329Parking

Important safety notes .................. 189Parking brake ................................ 190

14 Index

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 125Rear view camera .......................... 220Switching off the engine ................ 190see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee 360° camerasee Active Parking Assistsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONICsee Rear view camera

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 191Applying or releasing manually ...... 191Display message ............................ 281Electric parking brake .................... 190Emergency braking ........................ 192General notes ................................ 190Releasing automatically ................. 191Warning lamp ................................. 319

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 131

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 215Driving system ............................... 214Function/notes ............................. 214Important safety notes .................. 214Problem (malfunction) ................... 216Range of the sensors ..................... 214Warning display ............................. 215

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 289Indicator lamps ................................ 46Problem (malfunction) ................... 289

Perfume atomizerOperating ....................................... 153Problem (malfunction) ................... 155Vial ................................................ 153

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 364PLUG-IN HYBRID operating

Electrical energy generated ........... 249PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 253

Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 252Charge level of the high-voltagebattery ........................................... 245Charging the high-voltage battery .. 246Displaying the total range andelectric range ................................. 248Driving tips .................................... 251ECO start/stop function ................ 252Electric motor (power display) ....... 242Electrical energy generated(COMAND) ..................................... 249Energy flow display ........................ 245Fuel consumption .......................... 249Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ 249General notes ................................ 240Haptic accelerator pedal ................ 251High-voltage battery (condition ofcharge) .......................................... 245Hybrid drive system overview ........ 241HYBRID menu ................................ 272Important safety notes .................. 240Instrument cluster (power dis-play) ............................................... 242Instrument cluster overview .......... 242Manual drive program .................... 250Noiseless start ............................... 249Operating (on-board computer) ..... 245Operating mode ............................. 243Overrun mode ................................ 253Parking .......................................... 253Power display ................................ 244Power display (electric motor) ....... 242Problems ....................................... 254Problems with SRS (supplementalrestraint system) ............................ 255Problems with the combustionengine ............................................ 254Problems with the hybrid drivesystem ........................................... 255Problems with the RecuperativeBrake System ................................ 254Program selector button ................ 250Pulling away ................................... 250READY display ............................... 249Recuperative Brake System ........... 240Resetting the values (COMAND) .... 249Route-based operating strategy ..... 253

Index 15

Starting .......................................... 249When the vehicle is stationary ....... 251

Power locks ......................................... 87Power washers .................................. 360Power windows

see Side windowsPre-entry climate control (viaSmartKey)

Problems (malfunctions) ................ 157Pre-entry climate control at depar-ture time

General notes ................................ 157Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture

Setting departure time ................... 158Pre-entry climate control via key

General notes ................................ 155PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 284Operation ......................................... 59

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 271Display message ............................ 284Function/notes ................................ 75Important safety notes .................... 76Warning lamp ................................. 322

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 284Operation ......................................... 60

Program selector button .................. 173Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78Immobilizer ...................................... 78

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 24

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 165General notes ................................ 165Hill start assist ............................... 165

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 29

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28

RRadio

Selecting a station ......................... 265Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Rain closing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 99RBS (Recuperative Brake System)

Warning lamp ................................. 315Reading lamp ..................................... 134Rear compartment

Activating/deactivating climatecontrol ........................................... 145Setting the air distribution ............. 149Setting the air vents ...................... 160Setting the airflow ......................... 150Setting the temperature ................ 148Stowage compartment .................. 327

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatsAdjusting ....................................... 107Adjusting a rear reclining seat ....... 107Overview .......................................... 41Setting the reclined position .......... 107

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 363Displays in the COMAND display ... 221Function/notes ............................. 220

Rear window blind ............................ 334Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 152Switching on/off ........................... 151

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 123Dipping (automatic) ....................... 124

Recuperative Brake SystemDriving safety systems ..................... 44Important safety notes .................... 44

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 432Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Important safety notes .................. 177

16 Index

Refueling process (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles) ........................... 178see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 347Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 348

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 135

Reporting safety defects .................... 29Rescue card ......................................... 29Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 296Warning lamp ................................. 320

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 152Restraint system

Display message ............................ 287Introduction ..................................... 44Warning lamp ................................. 319Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 98Roller sunblinds ............................... 99Side windows ................................... 94Trunk lid ........................................... 89

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 292ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 211Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 99Rear side windows ......................... 333Rear window .................................. 334

Roller sunblind of the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

Operating (front roller sunblind) .... 100Operating (rear roller sunblind) ...... 100

Roof carrier ........................................ 330Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 366Roof load (maximum) ........................ 433

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 61Hybrid drive system ......................... 42see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety notesHybrid vehicles ................................ 42

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD memory cardSelecting ........................................ 266

SeatAdjusting the front-passengerseat from the driver's seat ............. 108Multicontour seat in the rear com-partment ........................................ 117

Seat belt buckle extenderDisplay message ............................ 285

Seat belt extenderFunction/notes ................................ 49

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 50Adjusting the height ......................... 49Cleaning ......................................... 366Correct usage .................................. 48Fastening ......................................... 49Important safety guidelines ............. 47Introduction ..................................... 46Releasing ......................................... 50Seat belt extender ........................... 49Warning lamp ................................. 313Warning lamp (function) ................... 50

SeatingSeating comfort package ............... 117

Seating comfort package ................. 117Seats

Active multicontour seat ................ 117Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106Adjusting (rear compartment) ........ 107Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 118Adjusting the head restraint .......... 114Calling up a stored setting (mem-ory function) .................................. 127Chauffeur mode ............................. 111

Index 17

Cleaning the cover ......................... 365Correct driver's seat position ........ 104Display message ............................ 310EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............. 122Important safety notes .................. 105Multicontour seat .......................... 117Seat heating .................................. 118Seat heating problem .................... 119Seat ventilation .............................. 119Seat ventilation problem ................ 120Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 126Switching seat heating on/off ....... 118Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 119

SectionWheels and tires ............................ 384

Securing a loadsee Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 329Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 365see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 362Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 269Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 430Coolant (engine) ............................ 431Engine oil ....................................... 429Fuel ................................................ 428Important safety notes .................. 427Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 432Washer fluid ................................... 431

Setting the charge current (on-board computer) ............................... 272Setting the departure time (on-board computer) ............................... 272Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 275On-board computer ....................... 269

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 276Side impact air bag ............................. 52Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 292

Side windowsCleaning ......................................... 362Convenience closing feature ............ 96Convenience opening feature .......... 95Important safety information ........... 94Opening/closing .............................. 95Problem (malfunction) ..................... 97Resetting ......................................... 96Reversing feature ............................. 94

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 82Changing the programming ............. 81Checking the battery ....................... 82Convenience closing feature ............ 96Convenience opening feature .......... 95Display message ............................ 312Door central locking/unlocking ....... 79Important safety notes .................... 79KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 81Loss ................................................. 84Mechanical key ................................ 81Overview .......................................... 79Positions (ignition lock) ................. 162Problem (malfunction) ..................... 84Starting the engine ........................ 164

SmartphoneStarting the engine ........................ 164

Snow chains ...................................... 386Sockets

Center console .............................. 336General notes ................................ 336Rear compartment ......................... 337Trunk ............................................. 337

Special seat belt retractor .................. 62Specialist workshop ............................ 28Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 274Digital ............................................ 263In the Instrument cluster ................. 33Selecting the display unit ............... 274

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 292

18 Index

Switching on/off ........................... 131Start/Stop button

General notes ................................ 162Key positions ................................. 163Removing ....................................... 163Starting the engine ........................ 164

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 164STEER CONTROL .................................. 77Steering

Display message ............................ 311Warning lamps ............................... 324

Steering Assistsee DISTRONIC PLUS

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 305Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 120Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 257Cleaning ......................................... 365EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 122Important safety notes .................. 120Paddle shifters ............................... 174Steering wheel heating .................. 120Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 126

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 122Switching on/off ........................... 120

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 174Stop&Go Pilot

see DISTRONIC PLUSStowage areas ................................... 325Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 327Center console .............................. 326Center console in rear compart-ment .............................................. 327Cup holders ................................... 330Door ............................................... 327Eyeglasses compartment ............... 326Glove box ....................................... 326

Important safety information ......... 325Rear ............................................... 327Rear seat backrest ......................... 328Stowage net ................................... 329see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 329Stowage space

Folding table .................................. 328Parcel net retainers ....................... 329Securing a load .............................. 329

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 329Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 386Sun visor ............................................ 333Suspension mode

Active Body Control ABC ............... 210Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 212Suspension settings

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 276Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 152

TTachometer ........................................ 256Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 292see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 33

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 427Information .................................... 425Tires/wheels ................................. 410Vehicle data ................................... 433

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 267Display message ............................ 311Introduction ................................... 267Menu (on-board computer) ............ 267Number from the phone book ........ 268Redialing ........................................ 268Rejecting/ending a call ................. 268

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 257

Index 19

Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 269Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 275Outside temperature ...................... 257Setting (climate control) ................ 148Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 275

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 390Checking manually ........................ 390Display message ............................ 306Maximum ....................................... 390Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 370Notes ............................................. 389Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 371Recommended ............................... 387

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 393Important safety notes .................. 393Restarting ...................................... 394

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 392Function/notes ............................. 390General notes ................................ 390Important safety notes .................. 391Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 393Restarting ...................................... 392Warning lamp ................................. 323Warning message .......................... 392

TIREFIT kitImportant safety notes .................. 369Storage location ............................ 367Tire pressure not reached .............. 370Tire pressure reached .................... 371Using ............................................. 369

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 404Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 403Bar (definition) ............................... 403Changing a wheel .......................... 405Characteristics .............................. 403Checking ........................................ 385Curb weight (definition) ................. 404Definition of terms ......................... 403Direction of rotation ...................... 405

Display message ............................ 306Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 405DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 403DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 402GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 403General notes ................................ 410GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 403GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 404Important safety notes .................. 384Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 403Information on driving .................... 384Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 404Labeling (overview) ........................ 400Load bearing index (definition) ...... 405Load index ..................................... 402Load index (definition) ................... 404Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 404Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 404Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 404Maximum tire load ......................... 402Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 404MOExtended tires .......................... 386Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 404PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 404Replacing ....................................... 405Service life ..................................... 385Sidewall (definition) ....................... 404Snow chains .................................. 386Speed rating (definition) ................ 403Storing ........................................... 405Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 403Summer tires in winter .................. 386Temperature .................................. 399TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 404

20 Index

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 404Tire pressure (definition) ................ 404Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 403Tire size (data) ............................... 410Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 400Tire tread ....................................... 385Tire tread (definition) ..................... 404Total load limit (definition) ............. 405Traction ......................................... 399Traction (definition) ....................... 405Tread wear ..................................... 399Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 398Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 403Wear indicator (definition) ............. 405Wheel and tire combination ........... 412Wheel rim (definition) .................... 403see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 64Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 381Important safety notes .................. 379

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 74

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 379Installing the towing eye ................ 380Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 381Removing the towing eye ............... 380Transporting the vehicle ................ 381With both axles on the ground ....... 380

Towing eye ......................................... 367Traffic Sign Assist

Activating ....................................... 229Display message ............................ 303Function/notes ............................. 229Important safety notes .................. 229Instrument cluster display ............. 230Switching on/off ........................... 270

Transfer case ..................................... 177Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransporting the vehicle .................. 381

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 365Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 262Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 261Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 263

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 93Important safety notes .................... 88Locking separately ........................... 93Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 92Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 90Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 91Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 89Power closing .................................. 87

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 309Obstacle recognition ........................ 89Opening dimensions ...................... 433Opening/closing .............................. 88

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 433Turn signals

Display message ............................ 291Switching on/off ........................... 131

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 425Installation ..................................... 425Transmission output (maximum) .... 425Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 351

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 87From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 86

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 275

Index 21

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 333Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29Data acquisition ............................... 29Display message ............................ 308Equipment ....................................... 25Individual settings .......................... 269Limited Warranty ............................. 29Loading .......................................... 394Locking (in an emergency) ............... 88Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 79Lowering ........................................ 409Maintenance .................................... 26Operating safety .............................. 27Parking .......................................... 189Parking for a long period ................ 192Pulling away ................................... 165Raising ........................................... 406Reporting problems ......................... 29Securing from rolling away ............ 406Towing away .................................. 379Transporting .................................. 381Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 87Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 79Vehicle data ................................... 433

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 433Vehicle emergency locking ................ 88Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 426Vehicle level

Active Body Control ABC ............... 210AIRMATIC ...................................... 212Display message ............................ 300

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 367Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 267VIN

Type plate ...................................... 426

WWarning

Stickers ........................................... 42Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 316

Brakes ........................................... 315Check Engine ................................. 320Coolant .......................................... 320Distance warning ........................... 322ESP® .............................................. 317ESP® OFF ....................................... 319Fuel tank ........................................ 320General notes ................................ 313Hybrid drive system ....................... 315Overview .......................................... 34Parking brake ................................ 319PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 46RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 315Reserve fuel ................................... 320Restraint system ............................ 319Seat belt ........................................ 313Steering ......................................... 324Tire pressure monitor .................... 323

Warranty .............................................. 25Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 311Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 412Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 409Wheel chock ...................................... 406Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 405Checking ........................................ 385Cleaning ......................................... 361General notes ................................ 410Important safety notes .................. 384Information on driving .................... 384Interchanging/changing ................ 405Mounting a new wheel ................... 409Mounting a wheel .......................... 406Removing a wheel .......................... 408Snow chains .................................. 386Storing ........................................... 405Tightening torque ........................... 409Wheel size/tire size ....................... 410

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 288Operation ......................................... 53

Windowssee Side windows

22 Index

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 151Infrared reflective .......................... 351

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 357Important safety notes .................. 431Notes ............................................. 431

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 139Replacing the wiper blades ............ 136Switching on/off ........................... 135

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 386Slippery road surfaces ................... 196Snow chains .................................. 386

Winter operationSummer tires ................................. 386

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 386

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 362Important safety notes .................. 136Replacing ....................................... 136

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 365Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 23

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

H Environmental noteHave a defective high-voltage battery dis-posed of in an environmentally-responsiblemanner. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter console

24 Introduction

Do not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevantsystems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 426).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.

Introduction 25

Z

During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to causedeath or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and youhave directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery Department

26 Introduction

One Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine andan electric motor. The voltage supply for oper-ating the vehicle electrically is provided by thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident and

Introduction 27

Z

the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system are marked with yellow warn-ing stickers. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in color.Vehicles with an electric motor generate muchless driving noise than vehicles with internalcombustion engines. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users in certainsituations. This can happen, for example, whenyou are parking and your vehicle is not seen byother road users. This requires you to adopt aparticularly anticipatory driving style, as it isnecessary to allow for the possibility that otherroad users may behave erratically.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect the

operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic componentsRwork on the hybrid drive system

28 Introduction

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again witha Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one ofthe following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.

Introduction 29

Z

These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rvehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.

30 Introduction

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which acci-dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-dent location) are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement could combineEDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investi-gation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by the EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 31

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 174

; Combination switch 131

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 33

A DIRECT SELECT lever 170

B Overhead control panel 39

C Control panel for:Ü Lowering the rear seathead restraints 116u Extending/retractingthe rear roller sunblind 334PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-tor lamp 46Adjusting the brightness ofthe instrument lighting andthe multimedia system dis-play

D Ignition lock 162Start/Stop button 162

Function Page

E Climate control systems 140

F Adjusts the steering wheel 120Steering wheel heating 120

G Cruise control lever 197

H Electric parking brake 190

I Diagnostics connection 28

J Opening the hood 352

K Light switch 130

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot 207Switching on Active LaneKeeping Assist 237Deactivating PARKTRONIC 214Switching on the 360° cam-era 224Activating Night View Assist 230Switching on the head-updisplay 259

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Multifunction display 258

= Tachometer 256

? Coolant temperature 257

Function Page

A Fuel gaugeFuel filler flap location indi-cator8: the fuel filler capis on the right-hand side.

i Information on displaying the outside tem-perature in the multifunction display can befound under "Outside temperature display"(Y page 257).

i Information on additional displays for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles can be found in the"PLUG-IN HYBRID operation" section(Y page 242).

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ! ABS 316

; å ESP® OFF 317÷ ESP® 317

= # Turn signal, left 131

? L Low-beam headlamps 131

A K High-beam headlamps 132

B T Parking lamps, licenseplate and instrument clusterlighting 131

C ! Turn signal, right 131

D · Distance warning 322

E ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 319

Function Page

F Electric parking brake (red) 319F USA only! Canada only

G ; Engine diagnostics 320

H Ð Power steering 324

I Brakes (red) 315$ USA onlyJ Canada only

J é RBS (RecuperativeBrake System) 315

K ü Seat belts 313

L 6 Restraint system 45

M h Tire pressure monitor 323

i Information on additional indicator andwarning lamps for PLUG-IN vehicles can befound in the "PLUG-IN HYBRID operation"section (Y page 242).

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 258

; Sets the brightness of theinstrument cluster and themultimedia system display 256

= Multimedia system display

? DVD changer or single DVDdrive

A Multimedia system control-ler and buttons

B ~

Rejects or ends a call 267Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Muteó

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System

Function Page

C ò

Opens the menu list9:

Selects a menu or submenuor scrolls through lists 257a

Confirms a selection 257Hides display messages 277%

Back 257ñ

Switches off the Voice Con-trol System

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the DVD changer or single DVD drive inthe Digital Operator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

36 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Center console

Function Page

: Switches multimedia systemon/off (see the separateoperating instructions)

; Adjusts the volume/mute(see the separate operatinginstructions)

= èECO start/stop func-tion 167É Sets the vehicle level(vehicles with PLUG-INHYBRID operation)

210,212

? Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)Telephone keypad (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

A É Sets the vehicle level 210Selects the operating mode(vehicles with PLUG-INHYBRID operation) 243

B Adjusts the suspension set-tings

210,212

Function Page

C Û Selects the drive pro-gram/program selector but-ton 173Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram/program selector but-ton (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) 173Selects automatic drive pro-grams E, S and E+ (vehicleswith PLUG-IN HYBRID opera-tion) 250

D Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

E Seat adjustment button (seethe separate operatinginstructions)

F Navigation button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

G Radio button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

H £ Hazard warning lamps 132

I Media button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

J Telephone, address book andInternet button (see separateoperating instructions)

Center console 37

Ataglance

Function Page

K Vehicle and system settingsbutton (see separate operat-ing instructions)

Function Page

L Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

i Information on the ECO start/stop functionfor vehicles with PLUG_IN HYBRID operationcan be found in the "PLUG_IN HYBRID oper-ation" section (Y page 252).

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 134

; |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 135

= G SOS button (mbracesystem) 341

? c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 135

A u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 135

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 134

C ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 343

D Eyeglasses compartment 326

E 3 Opens/closes the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 98Opens/closes the front rollersunblinds 100

Function Page

F µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 100Opens/closes the rear rollersunblind 100

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 348

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see the sep-arate operating instructions

I F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 342

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: s Seat ventilation 119

; c Seat heating 118

= w Adjusts the front-passenger seat from the driv-er's seat 108

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringwheel 126

A Adjusts the seats electrically 106

B 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 123

C WOpens/closes the rightside window 94

D W Opens/closes the rearright side window 94

Function Page

E 6 Unlocks fuel filler flap 179

F p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 92

G nOverride feature for thecontrols in the rear compart-ment 67

H Opens the door 86

I %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 86

J W Opens/closes the rearleft side window 94

K W Opens/closes the leftside window 94

40 Door control panelAt

aglance

Rear seats

i Example: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertain-ment System

Function Page

: DVD player (see the separateoperating instructions)

; Cigarette lighter 335Socket 336

Function Page

= Cup holder 331

? Stowage compartment in therear seat armrest 327

A Stowage box in the seatbackrest 328Coolbox 339

Rear seats 41

Ataglance

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Hybrid vehicles

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor.

Important safety notes

Danger of electric shock

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sureto observe the following sections:RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 381)RTowing a vehicle with both axles on theground (Y page 380)

Read the safety instructions on towing and tow-starting (Y page 379).

All components of the hybrid drive system aremarked with yellow warning stickers that warnyou of the danger of high voltage. The cables ofthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system areorange in color.The ignition must be switched off when carryingout general tasks, such as addingwasher fluid tothe windshield washer system or checking thecoolant level.

Automatic switching off of the hybriddrive systemIf components of the restraint system are acti-vated during an accident, the hybrid drive sys-tem is automatically deactivated.The hybrid drive system is not activated whenthe vehicle is started if:Ran electrical short circuit is detected in thehybrid drive systemRan electrical connection in the hybrid drivesystem is disconnected

This ensures that you do not come into contactwith high voltage.

Manual switching off of the hybrid drivesystemThe hybrid drive system can be deactivatedmanually using the high voltage switch-offdevice.

! To prevent damage to the hybrid drive sys-tem please observe the following instruc-tions:Ronly deactivate the hybrid drive systemmanually in the following situations.Rwork on the hybrid drive system may onlybe carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop, even when it has been deactivatedmanually.

42 Hybrid vehiclesSafety

Deactivate the hybrid system manually if:Rthe6 restraint systemwarning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up after an accidentRthe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after anaccident, and the restraint system compo-nents were not activatedRthe vehicle is badly damaged and has to betowed or transported

X If possible, move the vehicle out of thedanger zone: shift the automatic transmis-sion into position N.

X Release the electric parking brake.X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park itsafely.Get assistance from others if necessary.i The vehicle is locked automatically whenthe ignition is switched on and the wheels areturning. There is therefore a risk of beinglocked out if the vehicle is being pushed ortested on a dynamometer.

X Switch the ignition off.X Shift the automatic transmission to park posi-tion P (Y page 170).Depress the electric parking brake(Y page 190).Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 406).

X To use the high-voltage switch-off device:open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 329).X Remove the right-hand paneling in the trunk.

X Press release clip: in the direction of thearrow and pull it out.

X Pull the high voltage switch-off device;apart until it engages in the stop position.

If the hybrid drive system has been deactivateddue to reasons mentioned above, have it

checked at a qualified specialist workshopbefore reactivation.

High-voltage battery

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehiclestanding idle for lengthy periods can damagethe high-voltage battery.Hybrid vehicles: if the vehicle is idle forlengthy periods, run it for a few minutes onceevery six weeks to charge up the high-voltagebattery. During the charging process, switchoff all electrical consumers, e.g. the auto-matic climate control or the seat heating.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: make sure thatthe high-voltage battery is connected to acharging station during long periods when thevehicle is standing idle.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 180).

Engine compartmentBefore opening the hood:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to park posi-tion P.

X Switch the ignition off.

Hybrid vehicles 43

Safety

Z

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 162).

orX If the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Observe the warning notes on the risk of elec-tric shock (Y page 42).

X Observe the warning notices about the hood(Y page 352).

RBS driving safety system (Recupera-tive Brake System)The Recuperative Brake System supports youwhen braking with an electronically-controlledbrake boost mode and enables the recovery ofkinetic energy (recuperation).

G WARNINGIf the Recuperative Braking System malfunc-tions, braking resistance may be reduced andbrake pedal travel may be longer than usual. Ifyou subsequently depress the brake pedal asusual, the braking effectmay not be sufficient.There is a risk of an accident.In the event of this malfunction, continue todepress the brake pedal. Stop the vehicle inaccordance with the traffic conditions. If nec-essary, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

Further information about the RecuperativeBrake System (Y page 240).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:Rseat belt systemRair bagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 48)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 105).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 104).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 50).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.

44 Occupant safetySafety

Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 57).For information on children traveling with you inthe vehicle and on child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is runningAll vehicles, except hybrid vehicles:

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Hybrid vehicles:

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi-vidual restraint system components may betriggered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This couldaffect Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltageelectrical systemmay also not be deactivatedas intended in the event of an accident. Youcould suffer an electric shock if you touch thedamaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Immediately switch off the ignitionand remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock after an accident.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 61). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 53). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags"(Y page 50). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rearRBelt bags for the outer seat belts in the rear,depending on the vehicle's equipment

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGObjects next to the front seat that block thebelt buckle or the moving belt anchorage onthe front seat impair the function of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices. The EmergencyTensioning Devicesmay not function as inten-ded and the seat belt may no longer providethe intended protection. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Before starting the journey, make sure thatthere are no objects around the belt buckle orbetween the front seat and door.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the belt bags for the outer seat beltsin the rear (Y page 48)Ralways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsPay attention to the safety notes about the seatbelt (Y page 47).All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat beltcorrectly before setting off. Make sure that alloccupants are wearing their seat belts correctlyfor the entire journey.When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the beltbuckle that belongs to the seat.RThe seat belt is tightened across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.RThe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces produced in theevent of an accident be evenly distributedacross the belt.RThe shoulder section of the belt must alwaysbe routed across the center of the shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt should notcome into contact with your neck and mustnot be routed under the arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-sible over your lap.The lap belt must always pass across your hipjoints and never across your stomach orabdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can bepushed down across the hip joints and pulledtight using the shoulder section.

RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointedor fragile objects.If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g.eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these itemsin a more suitable location.ROnly one person should use each seat belt atany one time.On no account should babies or childrentravel sitting on the lap of another vehicleoccupant. During an accident, they could becrushed between the occupant and seat belt.RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if theseat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’soccupants.Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g.cushions, between the occupant and the seat.

Seat belts are solely intended for the protectionand restraint of the vehicle occupants. Tosecure objects, luggage or loads, alwaysobserve the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 325).

Rear beltbagsi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 50).

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theouter rear seat belts are equipped with a beltbag. This can be seen from the BELTBAG iden-tification on the rear seat belt.

G WARNINGIn an accident, the belt bag may damage anon-approved child restraint system. As aresult, the child restraint system may not beable to provide the intended level of protec-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.For this reason, a child restraint system withan integrated seat belt should always beinstalled using LATCH-type (ISOFIX). In a vehi-cle with optional belt bags for the rear seats,you should only ever use a booster seat withintegrated backrest that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz in conjunctionwith a belt bag. Never use a seat belt equippedwith a belt bag to secure a forward or rear-ward-facing child restraint system or a boos-ter seat that has not been approved. For infor-mation on approved child restraint systems,

48 Occupant safetySafety

please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Further information on child restraint systems(Y page 61).

When triggered, belt bags: open, increasingthe protected area of the occupants' ribcages.The belt bags are triggered depending on thetype and severity of the accident.

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 48).

Basic illustration

X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 50).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slidebelt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 62).

Rear seat belt buckle extendersThe seat belt extender is an integral part of thePRE-SAFE® convenience function. It is used onthe outer rear seats.Always ensure that it is possible tomove the beltbuckle freely. Always stow objects in the vehiclecorrectly.To assist you in finding the seat belt buckle andfastening the seat belt:Rthe belt buckle moves forwards to a conven-ient positionRthe belt buckle is illuminatedAfter the seat belt is fastened, the belt bucklereturns to its normal position. The seat belt thenlies tight across the lap and thorax areas.Incorporation into the PRE-SAFE® system:the belt buckle is lowered quickly in certain haz-ardous situations. This pre-tensions the seatbelt.Incorporation into the automatic measuresafter the accident: in this situation, the belt

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

buckle is illuminated and extended after a reardoor is opened.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff using the multimedia system. Information onactivating and deactivating the seat-belt adjust-ment function can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened

or a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until thedriver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe air bag installation point is identified by thelabel AIR BAG.An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thevarious air bag systems work independently ofeach other (Y page 57).There is, however, no system available todaythat can completely rule out injury or death.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

50 Occupant safetySafety

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 46).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the

vehicle" (Y page 61) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you aboutthe status of the front-passenger air bag(Y page 46).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 53). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit(Y page 54)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn. The driver's knee bag is alwaysdeployed along with the driver's front air bag.

The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occupantin the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol-ster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. It also offers addi-tional pelvis protection for occupants in thefront seats. However, it does not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.

52 Occupant safetySafety

The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside (front) deploys under the following condi-tions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 57).

Cushion air bagsi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 50).

The rear reclining seat is equipped with a cush-ion air bag. If the seat backrest is reclined, thecushion air bag can provide additional occupantprotection in the event of frontal collision situa-tions. When triggered, the cushion air bagdeploys under the seat cushion. This helps pre-

vent the occupant from slipping off the seatcushion.

G WARNINGIf a child restraint system is installed and theseat backrest is reclined too far backwards,the cushion air bag may deploy by mistake inthe event of an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.When using a child restraint system, alwaysensure that the seat is correctly adjusted andthat the backrest is almost vertical.

If you install a child restraint system on the rearreclining seat, always observe:Rthe instructions and safety notes in "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 61)Rthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag is either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g.cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of thefront-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie asflat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps indicate whether the front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactiva-ted.X Press the start/stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out a self-diagnosis test.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for about six seconds.The indicator lamps then display the status ofthe front-passenger front air bag:RPASSENGER AIRBAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the

case of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will thennot be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchanges whilst the vehicle is in motion, an airbag display message may appear in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 289). Always observe thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamps when the front-passenger seat is occupied. Make sure that thestatus of the front-passenger front air bag iscorrect before and during a journey.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could be

54 Occupant safetySafety

struck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat. For more information, see"Problemswith theOccupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 57).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

If OCS detects that:Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild aged up to twelve months in a standard

child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continu-ously after the system's self-diagnosis test.This indicates that the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.In the case of a twelve-month-old child in astandard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp maylight up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. Catego-rization is dependent on the type of childrestraint system and the stature of the child,for example. In this case, always install thechild restraint system on a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or asmall adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAGON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up continuously after the system'sself-diagnosis test depending on the catego-rization.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit, position the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alternatively, aperson of smaller stature can sit on a rearseat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up, a person of smaller statureshould not sit on the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of an appropriate size, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61).If the OCS is malfunctioning, both the red 6restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp light up simultaneously. In this case,the front-passenger air bag is deactivated anddoes not deploy during an accident. Have thesystem checked by qualified technicians assoon as possible. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Only have the front-passenger seat repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on thefront-passenger seat. Depending on the result,the front-passenger air bag is activated or deac-tivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 54).For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 57).

56 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rearseat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 45)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.Vehicles with belt bags: the belt bags are alsodeployed depending on the type and severity ofthe accident.Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: the Emer-gency Tensioning Device is only triggered if thebelt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle.If the seat backrest is reclined, the cushion airbag will also be deployed depending on the typeand severity of the accident.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG indicator lamps (Y page 46).

58 Occupant safetySafety

Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the control unit of the restraint systemdetectsa side impact or a vehicle rollover, the relevantcomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted separately depending on the anticipatedtype of accident.RSide impact air bags on the side where theimpact takes place, independently of theEmergency Tensioning Device and the use ofthe seat belt on the driver's seat and outerseats in the second row

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the fol-lowing conditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personalinjuries occurring as a result of an accident can-not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

style to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:when a driver assistance system intervenespowerfully or the radar sensor systemdetectsan imminent danger of collision in certain sit-uations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is inan unfavorable position.Rfor vehicles with electrically adjustable rearseats: the outer rear seats are adjusted if theyare in an unfavorable position.Rvehicleswith amulticontour seat: the air pres-sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrestis increased.Rvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seatbelts of the outer rear seats are pre-ten-sioned.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontourseats, the air pressure in the side bolsters isreduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE® PLUSintervenes.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention topull away

60 Occupant safetySafety

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seat-belt buckles for the outer rear seats are illu-minated and extend forwardsRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycallRvehicles with the hybrid drive system: thehybrid system and the high-voltage electricalsystem are deactivated

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 48).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 325).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinformation on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 53). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.Vehicles with seat belt extenders: whensecuring a child in a child restraint system on arear seat, observe the following instructions:Rmake sure that the seat belt on the childrestraint system is fastened according to themanufacturer's installation instructions forthe child restraint system.Rfor child restraint systems with a belt clamp:engage the belt tongue in the buckle beforeyou tighten the seat belt using the belt clamp.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: wheninstalling a child restraint system, move the rearreclining seat backrest to an almost verticalposition. The rear reclining seat backrest mustrest against the child restraint system. Observethe notes on the cushion air bag (Y page 53).Vehicles with belt bags: only use a childrestraint system which has been approved byMercedes-Benz. Always observe the instruc-tions and safety notes on belt bags for the outerseat belts in the rear (Y page 48).

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; on therear seats are covered by a Velcro-fastenedupholstered lining:.X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: adjustthe rear reclining seat backrest down a littlebefore installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system.

X Vehicles without rear reclining seat: foldupholstered lining: upwards.

X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: removeupholstered lining:.

X Vehicleswithout a rear reclining seat: turnthe support on the rear side of upholsteredlining: by 90°.Upholstered lining: remains foldedupwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings;.

X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: movethe rear reclining seat backrest to an uprightposition. The rear reclining seat backrestmust rest against the child restraint system.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

Vehicles without rear reclining seat: afteryou have removed the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, you must turn the sup-port on the rear side of upholstered lining: by90° again. Then fold upholstery lining: down.ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)securing rings; for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system are accessible.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. Awarning tonealso sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

The Top Tether anchorage points are installed inthe rear compartment behind the headrestraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move the head restraint up (Y page 116).X Fold up cover: of the Top Tether anchorage.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt? under the headrestraint between the two head restraint bars.

X Hook Top Tether hook= of Top Tetherbelt? into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether belt? is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether belt?. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover: of the Top Tether anchor-age.

X If necessary, move the head restraint backdown again slightly (Y page 116). Make surethat you do not interfere with the correct rout-ing of Top Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 53).

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 46) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entire baseof the child restraint systemmust always rest onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.The backrest of the child restraint system mustlie as flat as possible against the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be subjected to a loadby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwards fromthe vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust thevehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seataccordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 67)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 67)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

66 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverup in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp: is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

When the override feature is activated, the con-trols in the rear compartment are disabled for:Rthe rear side windowsRadjustment of the front-passenger seat fromthe rear compartmentRthe sunblinds:

- of the rear side windows- of the rear window- in the roof

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-

Pets in the vehicle 67

Safety

Z

cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 68)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 69)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 69)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 71)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 73)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 75)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 75)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 77)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 384).

In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 316) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 278).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General informationBAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of acollision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 68).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles with theDriving Assistance Plus package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a camerasystem, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contours andposture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions arerestricted or no longer available. The brake sys-tem is still available with complete brake boost-ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 69).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. fromthe sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BASPLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres-sure will be carried out at the last possiblemoment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the trafficsituation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front within aspeed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-ing force, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-neously (Y page 59).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 161).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Switching on/offThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.

You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 270). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).

The distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.If the distance warning function detects thatthere is a risk of a collision, you will be warnedvisually and acoustically.Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criticaldriving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentThe autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 59).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 59).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesG WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot intervene

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Adaptive Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicleswith 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, then ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 317) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 278).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function is not available forPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles.The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status. Exam-ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the enginewas switched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhen the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 269).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inMercedes-AMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

74 Driving safety systemsSafety

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speedsof about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunc-tion.

Crosswind Assist (vehicles withoutMAGIC BODY CONTROL)

General informationVehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: informa-tion on stabilizing the vehicle in the event ofcrosswind (Y page 210).Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle todeviate from a straight course. The crosswinddriving assistance function integrated in ESP®noticeably reduces these impairments.ESP® intervenes automatically according to thedirection and intensity of the crosswinds affect-ing your vehicle.ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assistyou in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isswitched off or deactivated because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 316) as well as displaymessages (Y page 280).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 208) and hill startassist (Y page 165).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationPRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize therisk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE®Brake has detected a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 68).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

For PRE-SAFE®Brake to assist youwhen driving,the radar sensor system and the camera systemmust be switched on and be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system and thecamera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detectobstacles that are in front of your vehicle for anextended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 76).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify people, especially if they are moving. Inthese cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-vene. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. fromthe sun being low in the sky

76 Driving safety systemsSafety

RdarknessRif:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-puter (Y page 271).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seatbelts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 59).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is endedautomatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.This steering assistance is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on awet or slippery road surface when you brake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is deactivatedRESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.Power steering will, however, continue to func-tion.

Driving safety systems 77

Safety

Z

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 10 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical key

Rthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is switched off.

orX Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends a messageor establishes a data connection providedthat:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

78 Protection against theftSafety

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 332). On vehicleswith the KEYLESS-GO start function, do notkeep it on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Oth-erwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g.when starting the engine using the Start/Stopbutton.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks thefollowing components:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated via themultimedia system; see the separate operatinginstructions.You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-firmation if all components were able to belocked.When the locator lighting is activated via themultimedia system, it lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey.Information on activating and deactivating thelocator lighting can be found in the separateoperating instructions.

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: press and hold theFbutton until the trunk lid opens.

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,press theF button on the SmartKey.When the trunk lid closes you can thenrelease the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 164).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the SmartKey and the correspondingdoor handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).A brief radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, thevehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 96).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power, thereby

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

conserving battery power. For the purposes ofactivation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not benearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp (Y page 82) of theSmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights uponce, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated .

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 164).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelon your own.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 82).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the door handle on the front-passengerdoor or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until thebattery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 82).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 78).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 87)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 93)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 88)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 82).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can obtain a battery from any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 81).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 82).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

SmartKey 83

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 82) and replace it if necessary(Y page 82).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 87) or lock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 87) or lock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 87) or lock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 80).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 82) and replace it if necessary(Y page 82).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 87) or lock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 87) or lock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Lock (Y page 87) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 374).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 376).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 82) and replace it if necessary(Y page 82).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Doors 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only open therear doors from inside the vehicle if they are notsecured by the child-proof locks (Y page 67). Ifthe vehicle has been locked with the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).

X To unlock and open a front door: pull doorhandle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull door handle;.Locking knob: pops up and the doorunlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;again.The door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The buttons are located on bothfront doors.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-cle locks.If the driver's door is open, the door staysunlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 67).If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

86 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using themultimedia system; seethe separate operating instructions.

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and trunk lid intotheir locks automatically even if they are onlypartly closed.X To power close a door: push the door intothe lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly pushthe trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunk lidclosed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 81).

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical keyas straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 82).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seated

Doors 87

Openingandclosing

Z

firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doingso.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 78).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanicalkey.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 86).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doors arestill visible. Press down the locking knobs byhand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 81).

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical keyas straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as itwill go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driver'sdoor is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid arelocked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 82).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle when doingso.

If you lock the vehicle as described above, thefuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarmsystem is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

88 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 433).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 325).

Obstruction detection with reversingfeature for the trunk lidVehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture: the trunk lid is equipped with automaticobstacle recognition with reversing feature. If asolid object blocks or restricts the trunk lidwhen automatically opening or closing, this pro-cedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stoppedduring the closing procedure, it will open againautomatically. The automatic obstacle recogni-tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attentiveness when open-ing and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is alsopossible to stop the closing process by perform-ing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.orX Pull handle:.The trunk lid opens.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.

Trunk 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture or power closing:

X Lightly push the trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunk lidclosed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 80).

i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked. It thenopens again.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is alsopossible to stop the closing process by perform-ing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 433).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

ClosingYou can close the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the closing button in the trunklid.

X Press closing button: on the trunk lid.orX If the SmartKey is located in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle: press theF buttonon the SmartKey.You can release the button as soon as thetrunk lid starts to close.

X To stop the closing process:RPress theF button on the SmartKey orRPull the trunk lid handle, orRPress closing button: or locking but-ton; on the trunk lid, or

90 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

RPress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door, orRIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:kick into the sensor detection range underthe bumper with your foot.i If theF button on the SmartKey ispressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initiatedafter the closing process is stopped, the trunklid opens.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors areclosed, you can simultaneously close the trunklid and lock the vehicle. The SmartKey must belocated to the rear of the vehicle.X Press and release locking button; on thetrunk lid.If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside thevehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehiclelocks.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk,the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,you can open or close the trunk lid or stop theprocedure without using your hands. This is use-

ful if you have your hands full. To do this, makea kickingmovement under the bumperwith yourfoot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.RWhen making the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clearanceto the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwiselose your balance e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kickingmovement within the detection range of sen-sors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Other-wise, the sensors may not function correctly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lidcould thus be opened or closed unintention-ally, for example, if you:- sit on the edge of the trunk.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- move the charging cable through the detec-tion range of the sensors.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson in these situations or in situations sim-

Trunk 91

Openingandclosing

Z

ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten-tional opening/closing of the trunk.

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.A warning tonewill soundwhile the trunk lid isopening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open/close afterseveral attempts: wait at least ten secondsand then using your foot kick under thebumper again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the trunk lid does not open or close.Repeat the leg movement more quickly if thisoccurs.To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rkick with your leg in the sensor detectionrange: under the bumper orRpull the handle on the outside of the trunk lidorRpress the closing button on the trunk lid, orRpress theF button on the SmartKeyIf the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop-ped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is alsopossible to stop the closing process by perform-ing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 433).

92 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing

X To open: pull the remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press and hold remote operatingswitch: for the trunk lid until the trunk lid iscompletely closed.

When the vehicle is stationary, you can close thetrunk lid from the driver's seat.When the vehicleis also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lidfrom inside.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remainslocked and cannot be opened.

Activating the function to lock the trunk sepa-rately:X Close the trunk lid.X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkremains locked.i You can also lock the glove box(Y page 326).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunk sep-arately:X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkwill also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKey, orRusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS, orRusing the remote operating switch in the doorcontrol panel:Use the emergency release.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 78).X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 81).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-tion2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 82).

Trunk 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Trunk emergency release from theinsideYou can unlock the trunk lid from the inside withthe emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lidemergency release when the vehicle is station-ary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does not unlockthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window from travelingupwards during the automatic closing process,the sidewindowopens again automatically. Dur-ing themanual closing process, the side windowonly opens again automatically after the corre-sponding switch is released. The automaticreversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-tute for your attention when closing a side win-dow.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

94 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding button.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the corre-sponding button.

X To close fully: pull the corresponding buttonbeyond the point of resistance.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. You canstop automatic operation by pressing/pullingthe switch again.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 67).

Before opening or closing the side windows, acheck is carried out to see whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle. The check is carriedout if you use the start/stop button instead of aSmartKey in the ignition and you press or pull abutton while the engine is switched off. This iscarried out by means of a brief radio connectionbetween the vehicle and the SmartKey.Information on opening and closing the rollersunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 333).

Convenience opening

General notesIf the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-cle, the convenience opening function is availa-ble.You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out thefollowing functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel and the roller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until the sidewindows and the panorama sunroof are in thedesired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Keep the% button pressed until the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is inthe desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Side windows 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close the rollersunblinds.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 94)Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel (Y page 98)Rthe roller sunblinds (Y page 99)

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.

X On vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: press and hold the& button again until the roller sunblinds ofthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Allthe doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.

X Vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: touch recessedsensor surface: on the door handle againuntil the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 95).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 95).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

96 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 97

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypush the sliding sunroof switch up or pull itback. The sliding sunroof raises at the rear.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

! When the sliding sunroof is open, water canget into the vehicle and cause damage. Thevehicle electronics can be damaged if waterenters the vehicle interior. Only clean the slid-ing sunroof when it is closed.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side windowslightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your attentionwhen closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop

98 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

automatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it low-ers slightly automatically at higher speeds. Thenoise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as aresult.At low speeds it raises again automatically.You can also temporarily deactivate automaticlowering. To do so, press the3 switch. Thesliding sunroof raises again automatically.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing theSmartKey from the ignition lock. This functionremains active for five minutes or until you opena front door.The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roofcarrier is installed. In order to allow ventilationof the vehicle interior, you can raise the slidingsunroof.If contact is made with a roof carrier approvedby Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowersslightly but remains raised at the rear.Before opening, raising or closing the slidingsunroof, a check is carried out to see whether avalid SmartKey is in the vehicle, if:Rthe3 switch is pressed or pulledandRthe Start/Stop button is used instead of theSmartKey in the ignition lockandRthe engine is not runningThis is carried out by means of a brief radio con-nection between the vehicle and the SmartKey.

Rain-closing featureThe raised sliding sunroof automatically lowersat the rear when driving if it starts to rain. Thesliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rainYou can manually cancel the automatic closingprocedure. Press or pull the3 switch in anydirection.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:. The rain-closingfeature remains activated.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The front roller sunblind can onlybe opened and closed when the sliding sunroofis closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a roller sunblind during the closingprocess, the roller sunblind opens again auto-matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-tion when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react in par-ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers. This means that the reversing featurecannot prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 99

Openingandclosing

Z

Openingandclosing the front roller sun-blind

The front roller sunblind can only be closedwhen the sliding sunroof is closed.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the3 switch in direction:.The front roller sunblind opens, then the slid-ing roof is raised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.The front roller sunblind opens.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=.The front roller sunblind closes if the slidingsunroof is closed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.

Opening and closing the rear roller sun-blind

Operating from the front

Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: youcan operate the rear roller sunblind from thefront.X To open or close: press button:.The rear roller sunblind opens or closes fully.

X To stop: press button: again.You must first open or close the rear roller sun-blind fully before you can move it in the otherdirection.

Operating from the rear compartment

X To open/close manually: press or pullswitch: to the point of resistance and holdit until the rear roller sunblind has reached thedesired position.

X To open/close fully: press or pull switch:beyond the point of resistance and release it.

If you press switch: again when the rear rollersunblind is fully opened, the degree of transpar-ency of the rear MAGIC SKY CONTROL elementchanges. If you pull switch: again when therear roller sunblind is fully closed, the degree oftransparency changes only when the roller sun-blind is opened (Y page 100).If the rear roller sunblind closes when the rearMAGIC SKYCONTROL element is not tinted, thistints automatically.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, thetransparency of which can be changed by apply-ing electrical voltage.MAGIC SKYCONTROL can be switched betweendarkened and transparent states.

100 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automaticallyafter a short period when you turn the SmartKeyto position 0 or remove the SmartKey.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the headliner is damaged orremoved, electrical components will beexposed. If you touch these components, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk offatal injury.RNever remove the headliner.RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-TROL carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKYCONTROL are protected behind the headliner.These are in the hidden portion of the movableroof element of the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel and above the left rear door.The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage transformeris stamped with a high-voltage symbol, warningyou about the high voltage. The electric cablesof the high-voltage section are color orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL fromthe front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the statusit was set to before the engine was switchedoff.

X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.

If the rear MAGIC SKY CONTROL element is in adifferent state than the front element, thedegree of transparency will change only in thefront element. Both elements will then be in thesame state and any further changes will againoccur synchronously.At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slowerand uneven. The entire process may take sometime.

Operating the rear MAGIC SKY CON-TROL element from the rear

X To change the degree of transparencywhen the roller sunblind is fully opened:press switch:.

X To change the degree of transparencywhen the roller sunblind is fully closed:pull switch:.The degree of transparency will change onlyafter the roller sunblind is opened.

If the rear roller sunblind closes when the rearMAGIC SKYCONTROL element is not tinted, thistints automatically.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 101

Openingandclosing

Z

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblind

Resetting the sliding sunroof or thefront roller sunblinds

Reset the sliding sunroof or the front roller sun-blind if the sliding sunroof or the front rollersunblind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch to the point of resistancein the direction of arrow: until the slidingsunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Pull the3 switch in the direction ofarrow: until the front roller sunblind isclosed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof and thefront roller sunblind can be fully openedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Resetting the rear sunblind

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull switch: repeatedly until the rear rollersunblind is fully closed.

X Keep switch: pulled for an additional sec-ond.

X Make sure that the rear roller sunblind can beopened fully again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

102 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 103

Openingandclosing

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 105).

X Check whether you have adjusted seat=properly (Y page 106).

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjustedproperly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 120).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjustedproperly (Y page 120).

When adjusting the steering wheel, make surethat:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 47).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 49).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirrorand the exteriormirrors in such away that youhave a good view of road and traffic condi-tions (Y page 123).

X Vehicles with a memory function: save theseat, steering wheel and exterior mirror set-tings with the memory function (Y page 126).

104 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 61).

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-

Seats 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats

Vehicles with standard head restraintsor luxury head restraints

: Head restraint height; Head restraint height= Seat height? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi-tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-tion (Y page 59).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 126).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seatsettings, certain seat adjustment functionswill automatically activate other seat adjust-ment functions.

i The head restraint height is adjusted auto-matically when you adjust the seat height orthe seat fore-and-aft position.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxuryhead restraint

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Seat height? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi-tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-tion (Y page 59).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 126).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seatsettings, certain seat adjustment functionswill automatically activate other seat adjust-ment functions.

i The head restraint height is adjusted auto-matically when you adjust the seat height orthe seat fore-and-aft position.

i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically when youadjust the backrest.

106 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the rear seat

Adjusting the rear seat

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and lengthA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthYou can only adjust the outer seats in the rearelectrically.

Adjusting a rear reclining seat

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and lengthA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Legrest angleC Legrest lengthThe rear reclining seat is only available in longwheelbase vehicles equipped with "executiveseats". On vehicles without a rear reclining seatthe button for setting the angle and length of thelegrest has no function.Vehicles with a long wheelbase: depending onthe vehicle equipment, the rear reclining seat is

either only on the front-passenger side or alsoon the driver's side.Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the rear recliningseat is on the driver's and the front-passengerside.Vehicles with a long wheelbase and equippedwith a "Rear compartment chauffeur/memorypackage" also have a footrest. This is located onthe lower part of the front-passenger seat back-rest (Y page 108).The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is thecase fold up the legrest and engage it.

Setting the reclined position

This function is only available with long wheel-base vehicles.You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 67).The SmartKeymust be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, before the rear seat can bemoved into the reclined position (Y page 162).X Press and hold button: until the seat hasreached the reclined position.The rear seat moves into the reclined posi-tion, the front-passenger seat moves into thechauffeur position (Y page 111). The footrestmoves out from under the front-passengerseat.You can exit the reclined position and adjustthe seat position by:Rcalling up a stored position using memorybuttons 1 or 2 (Y page 127)Rmanually adjusting the seat to the desiredposition (Y page 106)i The steps for setting the reclined positionare not always carried out simultaneously.

The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is thecase fold up the legrest and engage it.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the driver’s seat

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61).

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fullyforwards if there are objects in the parcel netin the front-passenger footwell. The objectscould otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

The SmartKeymust be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button: lights up,for the front-passenger seat you can adjust:Radjust the seat (Y page 106)Rseat heating (Y page 118)Rseat ventilation (Y page 119)Rthe memory function to call up or save set-tings (Y page 126).

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the rear

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

108 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 61).

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fullyforwards if there are objects in the parcel netin the front-passenger footwell. The objectscould otherwise be damaged.

i You can use the rear-compartment overridebutton to disable the setting of the front-passenger seat from the rear (Y page 67).

Adjusting the rear seat

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and length

X To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the but-ton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toB.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Backrest angle? Seat heightA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentThe SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toA.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the rear seat on vehicles withEASY ADJUST luxury head restraints

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the but-ton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat with buttons; toB.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat onvehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraints

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Seat heightB Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

The SmartKeymust be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toB.

EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints are availa-ble individually on vehicles equipped with a rearcompartment chauffeur/memory package.

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur modeand long wheelbase

Adjusting the rear seat

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthC Longitudinal direction of the legrest if rear

reclining seat is installedD Angle of the legrest if rear reclining seat is

installedX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the but-ton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toD.

110 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentB Seat heightC FootrestThe SmartKeymust be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toC.

The footrest can only be adjusted if:Rthe front-passenger seat is moved fullyforwardRthe front-passenger seat is in the position forchauffeur mode (Y page 111).

i The front-passenger seat in the Mercedes-Maybach must not be positioned fully for-wards when adjusting the footrest. The front-passenger seatmust bemoved forwards fromthe rear to the middle adjustment range.

Chauffeur mode

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased risk

of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is in chauffeurmode and the front-passenger head restraintis folded down, the view of the passenger-sideexterior mirror can be impaired. There is a riskof an accident.To have a free view of the exterior mirror,remove the front-passenger head restraint.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

General notesIn chauffeur mode:Rthe front-passenger seat is moved forwardsRthe backrest is tilted forwardsRthe head restraint is folded forwardsThe front-passenger seat automatically movesfrom the chauffeur position back into the normalposition if:Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted using theseat adjustment switch on the front-passenger doorRthe front-passenger seat belt is fastenedRan occupant is detected on the front-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat head restraint isinserted and the ignition is switched onRthe front-passenger seat backrest is movedbackwards or the seat is moved in a longitu-dinal direction out of the chauffeur area(Y page 113)

Seats 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Positioning the front-passenger seat forchauffeur mode

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 111). Adjust the seat for chauffeurmode before the journey (Y page 112). Do notremove the front-passenger seat head restraintduring the journey.

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 67).In order for the front-passenger seat to be posi-tioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe SmartKey must be in the ignition lock andin position 1 or 2 (Y page 162)Rthe front-passenger seatmay not be occupiedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forwards and hold it in thisposition.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the area forchauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeurmode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forwards. The seat moves forward.The To view the ext. mirror, adjustfront-passenger seat or remove the

head restraint. message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 310).i If the front-passenger seat is already at thethreshold to the area for the chauffeur mode,the position for the chauffeur mode is setimmediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode can besaved or set using thememory function of therear seat (Y page 127). For this the indicatorlamp on button: must be lit.

Adjusting from the driver's seat

In order for the front-passenger seat to be posi-tioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe SmartKey must be in the ignition lock andin position 1 or 2 (Y page 162)Rthe front-passenger seatmay not be occupiedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forward and hold it.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the area forchauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeurmode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forwards. The seat moves forward.The To view the ext. mirror, adjustfront-passenger seat or remove thehead restraint. (Y page 310)messageappears in the multifunction display.

112 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i If the front-passenger seat is already at thethreshold to the area for the chauffeur mode,the position for the chauffeur mode is setimmediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode cannot bestored or set with the driver's seat memoryfunction.

Installing/removing the head restraint

Removing

X Move the seat into the position for chauffeurmode, until the head restraint folds forwardcompletely (Y page 112).

X Fold head restraint bar covers; backwards.X Pull adjuster lever? backwards and hold it inthis position. Hold head restraint: whiledoing so.

X Remove head restraint:.X Release adjuster lever?.Red pin= protrudes from the adjuster lever.

X Press down red pin=.X Fold covers; forwards and close them.

Installing

X Fold covers; backwards.X Pull handle? backwards.Red pin= protrudes from the adjuster lever.

X Insert head restraint: into the brackets.The head restraint must engage on bothsides.

X Press down red pin=.If the pin can be pressed down and is then nolonger visible, the head restraint has engagedcorrectly.

X Fold covers; forwards and close them.The head restraint folds into position auto-matically.

Moving the front-passenger seat intothe normal position

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 67).The head restraint must be installed, in order forthe front-passenger seat to be moved into thenormal position (Y page 113).The SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it in thisposition.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

Seats 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold to thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.

i Further settings are available via the mem-ory adjustment buttons, if:Ra position in the normal setting has alreadybeen savedRthe front-passenger seat has been selectedwith button:

Adjusting from the driver's seat

The head restraint must be installed, in order forthe front-passenger seat to be moved into thenormal position (Y page 113).The SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it in thisposition.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold to thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.

i Further settings are available via the mem-ory adjustment buttons if the front-passengerseat has been selected with button:.

Adjusting from the front-passenger seatX Press any seat adjustment button.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.

Fully reclined position of the front-passenger seat

SettingThis function is only available on vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.You can move the front-passenger seat into afully reclined position. The rear seat and front-passenger seat then provide a continuous sur-face.To do so:Rmove the seat cushion of the rear seat as farback as possible in a longitudinal direction(Y page 107)Rmove the front-passenger seat into positionfor chauffeur mode (Y page 112)Rremove the front-passenger seat headrestraint (Y page 113)Rmove the front-passenger seat so that thebackrest is in a fully reclined position(Y page 106)

ExitingTo exit the fully reclined position:Rfold the backrest upright to a suitable positionRinstall the head restraint (Y page 113)

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat belt

114 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

There is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 105).Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back of theseat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow until itengages in the desired position.

X Tomove backwards: press and hold releasebutton:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the luxury head restraintmechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position for-wards: pull the head restraint forwards in thedirection of arrow; until it engages in thedesired position.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position back-wards: press and hold release button=.

X Fold the head restraint backwards in thedirection of arrow;.

X Let go of release button= once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint mechanically

Seats 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically when youadjust the seat backrest angle using the seatswitch.

Adjusting the front head restraints elec-tricallyThe height and fore-and-aft position of the fronthead restraints can be adjusted with the seatadjustment switch (Y page 106).

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Lowering the rear seat head restraintselectrically from the front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.i If all of the rear seat head restraints are low-ered and button: is pressed again, the outerrear head restraints move into the last storedposition.

Extending the outer rear seat headrestraints from the front electricallyThis function is available on vehicles with elec-trically adjustable rear seats.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraints have extended upwards.

Extending the outer rear head restraintsinto the last stored positionThis function is available on vehicles with elec-trically adjustable rear seats.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.

X Briefly press button: again.The head restraints move to the last storedposition.

Adjusting the luxury head restraint in therear compartment mechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:push or pull the head restraint in the directionof arrow;.

Adjusting the rear head restraints electri-callyThe height and fore-and-aft position of the rearhead restraints can be adjusted with the seatadjustment switch (Y page 107).

Supplementary cushion for luxury headrestraintsThe supplementary cushion is available on vehi-cles with electrically adjustable rear seats.Only use the supplementary cushion when thevehicle is stationary.

116 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The supplementary cushion is located in thevehicle.The supplementary cushion is attached to thehead restraint by three press studs.Installing the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwards aspossible (Y page 107).

X Hold supplementary cushion; against thehead restraint and push press studs: intothe counterpieces.

Removing the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwards aspossible (Y page 107).

X Release press studs: and remove supple-mentary cushion;.

Adjusting the rear center headrestraints

Retracting and extending electrically

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraint has fully extended or retracted.

Folding into position mechanically

X Pull the head restraint up until it engages.

Adjusting the multicontour seatThe settings for the multicontour seat are onlyactivated if:Rthe seat is occupiedRthe seat belt is fastenedThe multicontour seat can be adjusted via themultimedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Adjusting the active multicontourseatThe settings for the active multicontour seat areonly activated if:Rthe seat is occupiedRthe seat belt is fastenedVehicles installed with the Seat Comfortpackage: you can adjust the active multicon-tour seat for the driver and front passenger viathe multimedia system (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Multicontour seat in the rearYou can adjust the multicontour seats for theouter seats using the remote control (see theseparate operating instructions).

Seats 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportThe 4-way lumbar support can be adjusted withthe multimedia system (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Comfortpackage: the armrest in the door and the centerconsole can also be heated when you switch onthe seat heating of one of the front seats. Youcan adjust this using the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.Vehicles with the Seat Heating Plus package:you can set the distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrest on thefront seats via the multimedia system (see theseparate operating instructions).Vehicles with the Seat Heating Plus package:you can adjust the distribution of the heatedsections of the seat cushion and backrest on thefront seats via the multimedia system (see theseparate operating instructions).Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Systemand electric seat adjustment: you can set thedistribution of the heated sections of the rearseat cushion and backrest via the Rear Seat

Entertainment System (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Front seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Rear seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

118 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prematurelyor cannot be switchedon.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can beswitched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Front seats

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the blower setting you have selected.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"feature (Y page 95). The seat ventilation ofthe driver's seat automatically switches to thehighest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Rear seat

Switching the seat ventilation in the rear com-partment on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Seats 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prematurelyor cannot be switchedon.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can beswitched back on.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 122)RStoring settings (Y page 126)ROperating the on-board computer(Y page 257).

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

120 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheelheating is deactivated.

Steering wheel 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If there is a risk of becoming trapped byRthe steering wheel: move the steeringwheel adjustment lever.Rthe seat: press the switch for seat adjust-ment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function positionswitches. The adjustment process is stopped.This function is only available on vehicles withmemory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-tem (see the separate operating instructions).

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steeringwheel tilts upwards and the driver'sseat moves backwards if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock (Y page 162)Ropen the driver's door when the ignition isswitched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards andthe driver's seat only moves backwards if thedriving position is stored after seat or steeringwheel adjustment.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat isstored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 126).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop. Thedriver's seat only moves backwards if it is notalready in the rearmost position.

122 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat for drivingThe steering wheel and the driver's seat aremoved to the previously set position if:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert theSmartKey into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the ignitionis switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steeringwheel and the driver's seat onlyreturn to the last set position when the drivingposition is stored after seat or steering wheeladjustment.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat isstored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 126).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwards when the driver's door is openedor the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in themultimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare lever: for-wards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Mirrors 123

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Press button; for the right-hand exteriormirror or button= for the left-hand exteriormirror.The indicator lamp lights up in the button thathas been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selectedmirror usingadjustment button: as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic condi-tions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the "Fold inmirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyWhen the Automatic Mirror Folding func-tion is activated in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Press and hold button: until you hear a clickand the mirror engages audibly into position(Y page 124).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 123).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.

124 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Adjustment button= Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror? Button for the driver's side exterior mirrorX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving positionafter approximately ten seconds.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged during the process.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.

Mirrors 125

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Press memory button M: and one of thearrows on adjustment button; within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disengagedreverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignitionlock.

Storing settingsThememory function is only available in vehicleswith the memory package.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat, backrest, head restraint position andcontour of the backrest in the lumbar regionRactive multicontour seat: side bolsters of thebackrest, shoulder of the backrest, contour ofthe backrest, dynamic function levelRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrestRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

126 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 106).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 120) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 123).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1, 2 or 3 until the:RSeatRSteering wheelRExterior mirrorsare in the stored position.i If you release the storage position button,the seat, steering wheel and mirror settingfunctions stop immediately. Themulticontourseat setting or the 4-way lumbar support isstill carried out.

Memory function in the rear compart-ment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

General notesThe settings for the rear seat and the front-passenger seat can be stored using the rear-compartment memory function.RIf the indicator lamp in thev button is notlit, store the rear seat settings.RIf the indicator lamp in thev button lightsup, store the front-passenger seat and rearseat settings. Both the front-passenger andrear seat are taken into account with this set-ting. Depending on the equipment in the vehi-cle, two or three memory positions can bestored for the front-passenger and rear seats.

Storing settings

General notesWith the memory function in the rear, you canstore up to three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRmulticontour seat: the seat cushions of thebackrest as well as the contour of the back-rest in the lumbar and shoulder regionsRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrest if theindicator lamp in thev button is not lit

The following settings are stored to a memoryposition, if the indicator lamp in thev buttonlights up:Rposition of the footrest for the front-passenger seat, if availableRposition of the screen, if available

Memory function in the rear compartment 127

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Vehicles without rear reclining seat

The SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).Selecting a rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 107).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Selecting the front-passenger seat and rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 107).

X Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly(Y page 108).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat

The SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).Selecting a rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 107).

X Press the M memory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Selecting the front-passenger seat and rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 107).

X Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly(Y page 108).

X Press the M memory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

You cannot store any settings on the button forsetting the reclined position.

128 Memory function in the rear compartmentSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Calling up a stored setting

General notesThe memory positions in the area for the chauf-feur mode can only be set when the conditionsfor the chauffeur mode are fulfilled(Y page 111).

Vehicles without rear reclining seatThe SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To call up the stored rear seat setting:press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passenger seatand rear seat settings: press thev but-ton repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton1,2 or3 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat are in the stored position.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button. Theadjustment of the multicontour seat is stillcarried out.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seatThe SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and inposition 1 or 2, in order for the front-passengerseat to be selected (Y page 162).X To call up the stored rear seat setting:press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passenger seatand rear seat settings: press thev but-ton repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1 or 2 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat is in the stored position.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button. Theadjustment of the multicontour seat is stillcarried out.

Memory function in the rear compartment 129

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. In some countries,operation of the headlamps varies due to legalrequirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 131)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 274)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps

3 T Parking lamps, license plate andinstrument cluster lighting

4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlledby the light sensor

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theà position.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. Here, the Day‐

130 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

time Running Lights function must beswitched on via the on-board computer(Y page 274).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lightsetting is automatically selected according tothe brightness of the ambient light (exception:poor visibility due to weather conditions such asfog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-matically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have switchedon the Daytime Running Lights function inthe on-board computer, the daytime runninglamps or the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theà position.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoidusing the parking lamps T over a period ofseveral hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to theT position.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lock orit should be in position 0.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) or X ((right-hand sideof the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

Exterior lighting 131

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

High-beam headlampsX To activate manually: turn the SmartKey inthe ignition lock to position 2 or start theengine.

X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus: turn the light switch to position L orÃ.

X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus:turn the light switch to the L position.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus: if Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is acti-vated, it automatically controls activation anddeactivation of the high-beam headlamps(Y page 133).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the igni-tion lock to position1 or2, or start the engine.

X Pull the combination switch in the direction ofarrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

132 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notes

With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you canautomatically switch between low-beam, partialhigh-beam and high-beam headlamps.Partial high-beam is a form of illuminationwhereby the high-beam is directed past otherroad users. Other road users are kept out of thehigh-beam. This prevents glare. When there is avehicle in front, for example, the high-beamheadlamps illuminate the areas to its right andleft, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by thelow-beam headlamps.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.If the high-beam or partial high-beam are caus-ing too much reflection from traffic signs, thelights are automatically dimmed and glare forthe driver caused by the reflections is thus avoi-ded.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec-ognize road users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus may not recognize road users who dohave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated orwill be activated regardless. There is a risk ofan accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf-fic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam AssistPLUS on/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right

Exterior lighting 133

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up if it is dark and the light sen-sor activates the low-beam headlamps.At speeds above approx. 16 mph(25 km/h): the headlamp range is set auto-matically depending on the distance betweenthe vehicle and other road users.At speeds above approx. 19 mph(30 km/h):RIf no other road users are detected, thehigh-beam headlamps are automaticallyswitched on.RIf other road users are detected, the partialhigh-beam headlamps are automaticallyswitched on.

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster also lights up.At speeds below approx. 16 mph(25 km/h) or when there is sufficientstreet lighting:RThe partial high-beam headlamps areswitched off automatically.RThe high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically.

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp inthe multifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | Switches the automatic interior light-ing control on/off

= c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

? u Switches the rear compartment inte-rior lighting on/off

A p Switches the right-hand front readinglamp on/off

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

X To switch on the corresponding side ofthe vehicle: press button;.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamp lightup.

X To switch off: press button;.Press once: the make-up lamp goes out.Press twice: reading lamp: goes out.

134 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

X To switch on both sides of the vehicle:press button=.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamp lightup.

X To switch off: press button=.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamp goout.

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept when the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color, brightness, zone and display lightingfor the ambient lighting are set using the multi-media system (see the separate operatinginstructions).The interior lighting control can be operatedusing the front overhead control panel.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on or off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted viathe multimedia system (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the rear compartment interiorlighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamp on/off: pressthe p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automatically ifthe vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive emer-gency lighting: press the hazard warninglamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshieldbecomes dirty in dry weather conditions, thewindshield wipers may be activated inadver-tently. This could then damage the windshieldwiper blades or scratch the windshield.

Windshield wipers 135

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the power supply with the Start/Stop button or the SmartKey (Y page 162).

X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than inthe Ä position, causing the windshield wip-ers to wipe more frequently.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: thewasher fluid is fed through the wiper blades andwhen wiping with washer fluid î the washerfluid is emitted directly from the blades.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: if youpush and hold the combination switch beyondthe point of resistance in the direction of arrowB, themanual wash program is activated. If youbriefly push and hold the combination switchbeyond the point of resistance in the direction ofarrowB, the automatic wash program is acti-vated.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper armsvertically before folding them away from thewindshield. By doing so, you will avoid dam-age to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades (standardwindshield wipers)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Set thewindshield wiper to the° position.X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to thehood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Remove the SmartKey.X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshielduntil you feel them snap into place.

136 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wipers to position °.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-cal position, press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until the windshield wipers stop.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshielduntil you feel them snap into place.

Removing the wiper blades

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position the new wiper blade: withrecessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades (MAGICVISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Set the windshield wiper to position ° onthe combination switch.

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to thehood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X Remove the SmartKey.X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshielduntil you feel them snap into place.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set thewindshield wiper to the° position.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-cal position, press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until the windshield wiper stops.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshielduntil you feel them snap into place.

Removing a wiper blade

X To bring the wiper blade into position tobe removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with

Windshield wipers 137

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiperblade in the direction of arrow: beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade engages in the removal posi-tion with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly pressrelease knob; and pull the wiper bladeupwards=.

Installing the wiper blades

X Push the new wiper blade in the direction ofarrow: onto the wiper arm until tab;engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removal posi-tion in the direction of arrow= beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade disengages with an audibleclick and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

138 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

For a standard wiper sys-tem only: the windshieldwasher fluid from thespray nozzles no longerhits the center of thewindshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers 139

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andair humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filtercleans the air, thus improving the interior cli-mate.For vehicles with a combustion engine, the"Cooling with air dehumidification" function isonly available when the engine is running. Forhybrid vehicles, the "Cooling with air dehumidi-fication" function is also available via the elec-tric refrigerant compressor when the engine isnot running. Optimum climate control is onlyachievedwith the side windows and roof closed.If you start the engine using your smartphone,the last selected climate control setting is reac-tivated (Y page 164).The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 152).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 95). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired inte-

rior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa-ted automatically 60minutes after the Smart-Key has been removed depending on variousfactors, e.g. the outside temperature. Thevehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to drythe climate control system.

140 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Automatic climate control panel

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 147); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 150)? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 152)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 151)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (see separate operating instruc-

tions)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 151)D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 146)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 150)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 147)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 149)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 147)K Sets the airflow (Y page 150)L Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 145)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 149)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)

Overview of climate control systems 141

Climatecontrol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 147); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 150)? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 152)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 151)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (see separate operating instruc-

tions)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 151)D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 146)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 150)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 147)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 149)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 147)K Sets the airflow (Y page 150)L Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 145)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 149)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)

142 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

PLUG-IN HYBRID (USA only)Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 147); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 150)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 152)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 151)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (see separate operating instruc-

tions)Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 151)D Activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 158)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 150)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 147)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 149)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 147)K Sets the airflow (Y page 150)L Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 145)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 149)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)

Overview of climate control systems 143

Climatecontrol

PLUG-IN HYBRID (Canada only)Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 147); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 150)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 152)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 151)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (see separate operating instruc-

tions)Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 151)D Activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 158)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 150)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 147)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 148)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 149)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 147)K Sets the airflow (Y page 150)L Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 145)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 152)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 149)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 148)

144 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Notes on using automatic climatecontrol

Climate control systemBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use climate controloptimally.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp in theÃrocker switch lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the residual heat function if you want toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior when theignition is switched off. The residual heatfunction can only be activated or deactivatedwith the ignition switched off. The residualheat function is switched off when the ignitionis switched on.

If you are controlling the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel, notethe following:RIf you set rear-compartment climate controlusing the front control panel, theY sym-bol appears in the rear-compartment controlpanel display.RIf the rear-compartment climate control is setusing the front control panel, it cannot be setat the same time using the rear control panel.After completing the settings for the rear-compartment climate control using the frontcontrol panel, wait five seconds. You will thenbe able to control the rear climate controlusing the rear control panel.RAfter selecting the rear compartment set-tings, the front climate control can be con-trolled automatically again via the multimediasystem after five seconds.Alternatively, you can select "Cancel rearcompartment" in the multimedia system air-conditioning function bar.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 167).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only brieflySwitch on climate control primarily using theà rocker switch (Y page 147).

Activating/deactivating front climatecontrol using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To activate: press thet or! rockerswitch up or down.The climate control menu opens.

X Activate climate control via the air-condition-ing setting bar in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press thet or!rocker switch up or down.The climate control menu opens.

X Activate climate control via the air-condition-ing setting bar in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

Activating/deactivating rear-compart-ment climate control using the frontcontrol panelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-com-partment climate control using the front controlpanel (Y page 145).

Operating the climate control systems 145

Climatecontrol

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To activate: press thet or! rockerswitch up or down.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel orvia the multimedia system.

X Activate rear-compartment climate controlvia the air-conditioning setting bar.

X To deactivate: press thet or!rocker switch up or down.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Deactivate rear-compartment climate controlvia the air-conditioning setting bar.

Activating/deactivating rear-compart-ment climate control using the rear con-trol panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. All settings are displayed in full in therear-compartment display.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL lightsup.OFF is displayed in the rear-compartmentdisplay.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will alsonot be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, deactivate the coolingwith air-dehumidification function only briefly.

For vehicles with a combustion engine, the"Cooling with air dehumidification" function isavailable when the engine is running. For hybridvehicles, the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is also available via the electric refrig-erant compressor when the engine is not run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Switching on/offX To activate: press theÁ rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function via the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press theÁ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

orX Deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function via the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

146 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in theÁ button flashesthree times or remainsoff. Cooling with airdehumidification canalso no longer be activa-ted using the multimediasystem (see the sepa-rate operating instruc-tions).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.

Controlling front climate control auto-matically using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Set the desired temperature using thewrocker switch on the front control unit.

orX Set the desired temperature using the multi-media system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X To activate: press rocker switchà up ordown.The indicator lamp in theà rocker switchlights up.

X To switch to manual operation: press theK rocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

orX Set the airflow using the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).The indicator lamp in theà rocker switchgoes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lamp ontheà rocker switch goes out. The functionwhich has not been changedmanually, however,continues to be controlled automatically. Whenthemanually set function switches back to auto-matic mode, the indicator lamp on theÃrocker switch lights up again.

Controlling rear-compartment climatecontrol automatically using the frontcontrol panelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-com-partment climate control using the front controlpanel (Y page 145).X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press thet or! rocker switch up ordown.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel orthe multimedia system.

X Set the desired temperature using thewrocker switch on the front control unit.

orX Set the desired temperature using the multi-media system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Operating the climate control systems 147

Climatecontrol

X To switch on: press theà rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.

orX Activate automatic mode via the air-condi-tioning setting bar in the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).The indicator lamp in theà rocker switchlights up.i Select the temperature and automaticmode immediately thereafter. Otherwise, youwill have to select "Rear adjustment" againfrom the air-conditioning setting bar beforeactivating automatic mode.

X To switch to manual operation: press thetor! rocker switch up or down.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Use the air-conditioning setting bar to deac-tivate automatic mode.

orX Set the air distribution using rocker switchIorM on the rear control panel (Y page 141).

orX Set the airflow using rocker switchK on therear control panel (Y page 141).The AUTO indicator on the rear display goesout.

If you adjust the rear airflow or air distributionmanually using the multimedia system when inautomaticmode, theAUTO indicator on the reardisplay goes out. The function which has notbeen changed manually, however, continues tobe controlled automatically. When the manuallyset function switches back to automatic mode,the AUTO display reappears in the rear-com-partment display.

Controlling rear climate control auto-matically using the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Set the desired temperature using rockerswitchesH andN (Y page 141).

X To activate: press rocker switchJ up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJ lightsup.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchJ up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJ goesout.

If you adjust the airflow or air distribution man-ually when in automaticmode, theAUTO displayin the rear-compartment display goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed manually,however, continues to be controlled automati-cally. When the manually set function switchesback to automatic mode, the AUTO displayreappears in the rear-compartment display.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsIn automatic mode you can select the followingairflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX To set: set the climate mode using the mul-timedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Setting the temperature

General notes

148 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

You can set the temperature separately for thefollowing areas on vehicles without rear-com-partment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger area

You can set the temperature separately for thefollowing areas on vehicles with rear-compart-ment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger areaRrear compartment, left and right

Setting the temperature in the frontcompartment using the front controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.

orX Set the temperature using the multimediasystem (see the separate operating instruc-tions).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rearcompartment using the front controlpanelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-com-partment climate control using the front controlpanel (Y page 145).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press thet or! rocker switch up ordown.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel orthe multimedia system.

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down on the front controlpanel.

orX Set the temperature using the multimediasystem (see the separate operating instruc-tions).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switchH orN up or down (Y page 141).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the footwell temperatureThe footwell temperature for the driver and frontpassenger can be set separately using the mul-timedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents

Operating the climate control systems 149

Climatecontrol

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

W Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting the air distribution in the front/rear compartments using the multime-dia systemThe air distribution for the left and right sides ofthe front and rear compartment can be adjustedusing the multimedia system (see the separateoperating instructions).

Setting the air distribution in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press rocker switchI orM up or downrepeatedly (Y page 141) until the desired airdistribution symbol is shown in the display.

Setting the airflow

General notesYou can select different airflow settings for thedriver's and front-passenger sides as well as forthe rear compartment (only vehicles with rearcompartment climate control).Observe the notes on controlling the rear-com-partment climate control using the front controlpanel (Y page 145).

Setting the front-compartment airflowusing the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To increase or reduce: press theKrocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the rear-compartment airflowusing the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press thet or! rocker switch up ordown.The climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condition-ing setting bar (see the separate operatinginstructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel orvia the multimedia system.

X To increase or reduce: press theKrocker switch up or down on the front controlpanel.

orX Set the airflow using the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switchK up or down (Y page 141).

Activating or deactivating the syn-chronization functionClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The settings for tem-perature, air distribution and airflow on the driv-er's side are adopted for the front-passengerside and the rear compartment (vehicles withrear-compartment air conditioning).X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the synchronization function using themultimedia system (see the separate operat-ing instructions).Vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning: the SYNC display appears on therear-compartment display.

The synchronization function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger side arechangedRvehicles with rear-compartment air condition-ing: the settings for the rear compartment arechanged

150 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or frontside windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To switch on: press the¬ rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rocker switchlights up.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode offRwindshield heating onRcooling with air dehumidification

X To deactivate: press the¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rocker switchgoes out. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà rocker switch up or down.orX Use thet or! rocker switch to call upthe multimedia system climate control menu.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function with theÁ rocker switch.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function via the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"Windshield defrosting" function using the

¬ rocker switch. The windshield heating isswitched on.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the¤ rocker switchlights up or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 151

Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flow offresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-ing the vehicle from outside. The air alreadyinside the vehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To activate: press theg rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp in theg rocker switchlights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-cally:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollutionRin a tunnelThe indicator lamp in theg rocker switch isnot lit when automatic air-recirculation mode isactivated. Outside air is added after about30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in theg rocker switchgoes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesVehicles with rear-compartment climatecontrol: once the engine is switched off, it ispossible to make use of the residual heat of theengine to continue heating or ventilating therear and front compartment of the vehicle forapproximately 15minutes. If the "Residual heat"function is set for only the front or only the rearcompartment, it is possible to continue heatingor ventilating for approximately 30 minutes.Vehicleswithout rear-compartment climatecontrol: once the engine is switched off, it ispossible to make use of the residual heat of theengine to continue heating or ventilating thefront compartment of the vehicle for approx-imately 30 minutes.The heating or ventilation time depends on thetemperature that has been set.

152 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 162).

X To activate: press the! orÁ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp in the! orÁ rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless ofthe airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function at hightemperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-vated. The blower runs at medium speed.X To deactivate: press the! orÁrocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the! orÁ rockerswitch goes out.

Rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 162).The REST display appears on the rear com-partment display.

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL lightsup.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 141).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. REST goes out on the rear compartmentdisplay.i If you do not activate the residual heat func-tion, REST goes out automatically after fiveminutes on the rear compartment display.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30minutes if the residualheat function is activated in the front or rearcompartmentRafter approximately 15minutes if the residualheat function is activated in the front and rearcompartmentsRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNINGIf children open the vial, they could drink theperfume or it could come into contact withtheir eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do notleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull vials must not be dis-posed of with householdwaste. They must be collec-ted separately and recycledto protect the environment.

Dispose of full vials in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner and take them to aharmful substance collec-tion point.

: Vial lid; VialThe perfume atomizer helps to improve drivingcomfort.Via the multimedia system you can:Rswitch the perfume atomizer on or offRregulate the perfume intensity (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

Operating the climate control systems 153

Climatecontrol

Z

The following conditions can affect your percep-tion of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the climate control systemRinterior temperatureRtime of year or dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-gue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operatedwhen the climate control system is switched onand is only active when the glove box is closed.The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-led vial. You can also choose from a variety offilled perfume vials and an empty vial which youcan fill yourself.If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to the vial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe the manufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it isempty. Dispose of the used vial after use.X To insert the perfume vial: open the glovebox (Y page 326).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far asit will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid ofthe empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per-fume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside thevehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could dripinto the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-izer.

154 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The vehicle interior is notperfumed although theperfume atomizer is acti-vated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it willgo.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.(15 ml) of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty.X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

IonizationYou can use the "Ionization" function to purifythe air in the vehicle interior and attain animproved interior climate.The ionization of the interior air is odorless andcannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-rior.You can switch ionization on or off using themultimedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).Ionization can only be switched on if the frontclimate control system is activated. The side airvent on the driver's side must be open.

Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key

General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"function is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles.Before getting in, the driver's seat area or thewhole interior can be briefly warmed or ventila-ted in advance with the air from the air ventsbeing pre-cooled.The high-voltage battery must be sufficientlycharged before "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" can be activated.

When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the followingfunctions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilationWhen the vehicle is pre-heated, the followingfunctions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defrosterIf you have activated the following functionsusing the multimedia system, they are activatedtogether with the "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" function:RArmrest heatingRPerfume atomizerRIonizationActivating the perfume atomizer or ionization(see separate operating instructions).

Activating or deactivating "Pre-entryclimate control via SmartKey"Before "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"can be activated, you must activate the functionvia the multimedia system (see separate oper-ating instructions).

Operating the climate control systems 155

Climatecontrol

Z

X To activate pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey: unlock the vehiclewith the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.The climate control functions are activatedfor up to 5 minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.

To deactivate "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey": "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" switches off automatically when theengine is started.The following functions remain active after theengine is started:RSeat heating (heating)RSeat ventilation (ventilation)RArmrest heatingRPerfume atomizerRIonizationAn activated "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" function can be deactivated usingthe rocker switch (Y page 158).

156 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

"Pre-entry climate con-trol via SmartKey" can-not be switched on orhas switched itself off.

The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is under the speci-fied minimum condition of charge.X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill.The engine powers the electric motor. The electric motor operatesas a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged.

Further information on charging the high-voltage battery via:Ra mains socket (Y page 183)Ra charging station (Y page 186)Ra wallbox (Y page 185)

"Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" has been started more thantwice with the engine switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Try again to switch on "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey".

Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function is only available in PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles.You can use the "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" function to cool or heat thevehicle interior if the engine is not running.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function can be activated regardless ofwhether or not the vehicle is connected to anelectric power supply. The condition of charge ofthe high-voltage batterymust be higher than thespecified minimum condition of charge, how-ever.When the vehicle is connected to an electricpower supply, priority is given to charging thehigh-voltage battery to the specified minimum

charge. "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" is only activated subsequently.The running time of the "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" function may be reducedif:Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electricpower supply andRthe high-voltage battery is not fully chargedWith active "Pre-entry climate control at depar-ture time" the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery can be reduced, even if thecharge cable connector is connected.When the vehicle is cooled, the following func-tions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilationWhen the vehicle is heated, the following func-tions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRArmrest heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defrosterIf you have switched on the perfume atomizer orthe ionization using the multimedia system,

Operating the climate control systems 157

Climatecontrol

Z

these will be activated together with the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time".Activating the perfume atomizer or ionization(see separate operating instructions).

Setting the departure timeYou can set the departure time using the on-board computer or via theMyMercedes Electric– Vehicle Homepage. The activation of the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" func-tion can be linked to this departure time. Yourvehicle will then be cooled or heated until thedesired temperature is reached in time for theset departure time. "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" will be activated a maximum of55 minutes before departure. If the departure isdelayed, the vehicle will be heated or cooled foranother five minutes.X To set the departure time: set the departuretime using the on-board computer(Y page 272). Set the departure time via theMy Mercedes Electric – Vehicle Homepage(Y page 189).

X To activate or deactivate "Pre-entry cli-mate control at departure time": activateor deactivate "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" via the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).Activate or deactivate "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" via the My MercedesElectric – Vehicle Homepage (Y page 189).

When activating the "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" function: you can selectwhether only the driver's area or the whole vehi-cle interior should be heated or cooled.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function switches off automatically whenthe vehicle is started. The following functionsremain active:RSeat heatingRSeat ventilationRArmrest heatingRSteering wheel heatingRPerfume atomizerRIonizationSwitching off "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time": the activated "Pre-entry cli-mate control at departure time" can be switchedoff using the rocker switch (Y page 158).

Activating or deactivating "Immediatepre-entry climate control" using therocker switchYou can activate "Immediate pre-entry climatecontrol" even if the vehicle interior is already atthe desired temperature. This means that thevehicle interior continues to be cooled orheated, e.g. if the journey is interrupted for up to50minutes, and the interior temperature is keptconstant.

X To activate or deactivate "Immediate pre-entry climate control": press rockerswitch: up or down.The blue or red indicator lamp on the rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

The colors of the indicator lamps on rockerswitch: have the following meanings:Rblue: cooling activatedRred: heating activatedRyellow: departure time is preselected

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

158 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Fixed center air vent; Center air vent, right= Center vent control, right? Center vent control, leftA Center air vent, leftX To open/close: press control= or?.The control pops out.

X Turn control= or? counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear airvent; orA by themiddle fin andmove up ordown or to the left or right.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for left side air ventX To open/close: press control=.The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise or clock-wise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by the middle fin and move it up ordown or to the left or right.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-ture-sensitive items stored in the glove boxcould be damaged.

When the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instance tocool its contents. The level of airflowdepends onthe airflow and air distribution settings.

: Air vent control; Air vent

Setting the air vents 159

Climatecontrol

Z

X To open or close: turn control: to the rightor left.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rear com-partment

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent control, right? Rear control panel (only vehicles with rear-

compartment climate control )A Rear-compartment air vent control, leftX To open/close: press control= orA.The control pops out.

X Turn control= orA counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold the rear airvent: or; by themiddle fin andmove up ordown or to the left or right.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

X To open or close: turn thumbwheel; to theleft or right.

X To adjust the air direction: hold B-pillar airvent: by the middle fin handle and move upor down or to the left or right.

160 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift in goodtime, before the tachometer needle reachesÔ of the way to the red area of the tachom-eter.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

Driving 161

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles (Y page 42).

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engineThe SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lockeven if it is not the correct SmartKey for thevehicle. The ignition is not switched on. Theengine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notesAll vehicles are equipped with a removableStart/Stop button.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the Smartkey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.

162 DrivingDrivingandparking

To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartkey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe Smartkey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 80).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 332). Otherwise,the key will not be detected, e.g. when startingthe engine with the Start/Stop button.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the front door (Y page 86), you can continueto start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lock

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after startingthe engine or lights up while driving(Y page 315).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if:Ryou do not start the engine within 15 minuteswhen in this positionRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the Smartkey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stopbutton mode and Smartkey operation when thetransmission is in position P.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartkey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the Smartkey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Driving 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesDuring a cold start, the engine runs at higherspeeds to enable the catalytic converter toreach its operating temperature. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 170).The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P (Y page 172).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKey insteadof the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning (Y page 162).

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and theSmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-tion.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with youwhen leaving the vehicle, even if you only leaveit for a short time. Pay attention to the importantsafety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 162).The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphoneObserve the important safety notes on startingthe engine (Y page 164).You can also start your engine via your smart-phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the

164 DrivingDrivingandparking

previously selected climate control setting isactivated. In this way you can cool or heat theinterior of the vehicle before starting the jour-ney.Only start the engine via your smartphone if it issafe to start and run the engine where your vehi-cle is parked.Observe the legal stipulations in the area whereyour vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-phone may be limited to certain countries orregions.You can execute amaximum of two consecutivestarting attempts via your smartphone. If youinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, youcan carry out two more starting attempts.Once you have started the engine, you canswitch the engine off via your smartphone at anytime.You can only start the engine via your smart-phone if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lockRpark position P is selectedRthe accelerator pedal is not depressedRthe anti-theft alarm system is not activatedRthe panic alarm is not activatedRthe hazard warning lamps are switched offRthe hood is closed.Rthe doors are closed and lockedRthe windows and sliding sunroof are closedAlso make sure that:Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filledRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNINGLimbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally during ser-vice or maintenance work. There is a risk ofinjury.Always secure the engine against uninten-tional starting before carrying out mainte-nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started viayour smartphone before carrying out mainte-nance or repairs. You can prevent an enginestart via your smartphone, for example, if you:Rswitch on the hazard warning lampsRdo not lock the doorsRopen the hood

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 87).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased.If you do not depress the brake pedal, theDIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 191).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Driving 165

Drivingandparking

Z

Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function (all vehiclesexcept PLUG‑IN HYBRID)

IntroductionThis section describes the ECO start/stop func-tion for all vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles. Information on the ECO start/stopfunction on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles(Y page 252).The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theèECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It is

166 DrivingDrivingandparking

then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): automatic engine switch-off can takeplace a maximum of four times in a row (initialstop, then three subsequent stops).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRyou switch to drive program S or MRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P does notstart the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.If drive program S or M has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactivated.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the drive pro-gram automatically switches to E.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive programC, press ECObutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S orM (Y page 173).Indicator lamp; goes out.

Driving 167

Drivingandparking

Z

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If drive program S or M is active, the auto-matic transmission switches to drive programC.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.If drive program S or M has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactivated.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the drive pro-gram automatically switches to C.

168 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 164). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 376).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 356). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles (Y page 42).

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display (Y page 172) in the multifunc-tion display.

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 209) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 203).

170 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 166).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Automatic transmission 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission position display

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles)The current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive programThe arrows in the transmission position displayshowhow and intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram E (for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles selectdrive program E+) or S.

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Drive program

The arrows in the transmission position displayshowhow and intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram C or S.

Transmission positions

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 189). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

172 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 173)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 173)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-ment restricts switching between transmissionpositionsD and R to speeds up to amaximum of5mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R, move theDIRECT SELECT lever up and down past thepoint of resistance.

Program selector buttonThis section describes the program selector but-ton for all vehicles except PLUG-INHYBRID vehi-cles. Information on automatic drive programsfor PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 250).

X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles and PLUG-IN HYBRID): press programselector button: to change the drive pro-gram.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press programselector button: repeatedly until the letterfor the desired drive program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button influences:Rthe drive program (Y page 174)Rthe engine managementOn Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E iscalled drive program C.The automatic transmission switches to auto-matic drive program E (drive program C inMercedes-AMG vehicles).All vehicles (exceptMercedes-AMGvehiclesand PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

Automatic transmission 173

Drivingandparking

Z

You can also activate manual drive program Musing the steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 174). In manual drive program M, youcan briefly change gear yourself by using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.Mercedes-AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Permanent drive programM is only available forMercedes-AMG vehicles.Further information about permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 175).You can also activate manual drive program Musing the steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 174). In manual drive program M, youcan briefly change gear yourself by using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 174).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

You can activate manual drive programM in theE (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic driveprograms using steering wheel paddle shift-ers: and; (Y page 174). In manual driveprogramM, you can briefly change gear yourselfby using the steering wheel paddle shifters.Mercedes-AMGvehicles: you can also activatemanual drive program M with the programselector button (Y page 175). In manual driveprogram M, you can permanently change gearyourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program EDrive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,for example on slippery road surfaces.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.

Automatic drive program SDrive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine settings.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.You can activate manual drive programM in theE (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) and S auto-matic drive programs.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: as well as temporarydrive program M, you can also activate perma-nent drive program M. Further informationabout permanent drive program M(Y page 175).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 174).Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-vated.

174 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles:) M and the selected gear appear in themultifunction display.

Further information on activating manual driveprogram M on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles(Y page 250).

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for a limi-ted amount of time. Depending on which paddleshifter is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear down orup, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (Y page 174).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If themaximum engine speed on the currentlyengaged gear is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts up in order to prevent enginedamage.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission will not shift up to the next gearwhen the engine speed is very low.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 174).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activatedmanual drive programM, itwill remain active for a certain amount of time.Under certain conditions the minimum amountof time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateralacceleration, during an overrun phase or whendriving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deactiva-ted, the automatic transmission shifts into theautomatic drive program that was last selected.You can also deactivate manual drive programM yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in place (Y page 174).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 173).Manual drive program M is deactivated. Theautomatic transmission switches to the pre-viously activated drive program E (drive pro-gram C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S.

Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.Manual drive program M is different from driveprogram S with regard to spontaneity, respon-siveness and smoothness of gear changes.As well as this permanent drive programM, youcan also activate temporary drive programM (Y page 174).

Automatic transmission 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching on the manual drive programInmanual drive programM, you can change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters if thetransmission is in position D. You can see thecurrently selected drive programandwhich gearis engaged in the multifunction display.X Press the program selector button(Y page 173) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

Upshifting! In manual drive program M, the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When message; appears in the multifunc-tion display, pull on the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 174).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear if this is permissible.

Maximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects the opti-mum gear according to the speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,the automatic transmission automatically shiftsdown.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 173) repeatedly until C or S appearsin the multifunction display.

176 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.7G-TRONIC: it is only possible to shift into second gear and reversegear.9G-TRONIC: it is only partly possible to engage the gears or the trans-mission is in position N.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.7G-TRONIC: If D is selected, the transmission shifts into secondgear, if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation (Y page 254).

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni-tion must be switched off (the SmartKey orStart/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1)if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometerRthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicles with4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

Refueling 177

Drivingandparking

Z

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-tem could be blocked by particles from thefuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 428).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 177).PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles: pressure in the fueltank must be released before refueling.Except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if youunlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, thefuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed inthe instrument cluster8. The arrow next tothe filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Preparing to refuelX Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Opening the fuel filler flap (exceptPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be used

178 RefuelingDrivingandparking

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak out.

Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles)

X Pull switch:.Indicator lamp; flashes and the PleaseWait Depressurizing Tank messageappears in the multifunction display.If the fuel filler cap is open, indicator lamp;lights up.The Tank is Depressurized Ready forRefueling message appears in the multi-function display.Please be sure to observe the information onrefueling on the fuel filler flap.

There is a malfunction if:Rindicator lamp; first flashes and then goesoutRthe yellow engine diagnostics warning lamplights up

i From a speed of 2 km/h, the fuel filler capcan no longer be opened.

i The opening process for the fuel filler capmay take up to 15 minutes.

: To insert the fuel filler cap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type to be usedX Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.If you drive at speeds above 1 mph (2 km/h)with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel FillerFlap Open message is shown in the multifunc-tion display.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 296).In addition, the; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 320).

i For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 320).

Refueling 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 162).orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 162).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79).X PLUG-IN HYBRID Vehicles: depressurize the fuel tank(Y page 178).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 81).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the high-voltage battery(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)

Important safety notes

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G DANGERIf you use incorrectly installed mains socketsor adapters, extension cables or similar toconnect the charging cable to amains socket,this could lead to fires or an electric shock.There is a risk of fatal injury.

180 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to mainssockets that:- are installed correctly and- have been approved by an electrical spe-cialist.

RFor safety reasons, only use the chargingcables supplied with the vehicle, or charg-ing cables which have been approved foruse with this vehicle.RNever use a damaged charging cable.RDo not use:

- Extension cables- Cable drums- Multiple socketsRDo not use a socket adapter to connect thecharging cable to the mains socket. Theonly exception is if the adapter has beentested and approved by the manufacturerfor charging the high-voltage battery in anelectric vehicle.RAlways observe the safety notes in thesocket adapter's operating instructions.

G DANGERConnecting the charging cable to the vehiclevia an incorrectly installed wallbox or bymeans of adapters, extension cables or simi-lar could cause a fire or an electric shock.There is a risk of fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to a wall-box if:- the wallbox is installed correctly- the wallbox has been inspected by aqualified electrician and

- the charging cable is undamagedRDo not extend the charging cableRDo not use an adapterRAlways observe the safety notes in the wall-box's operating instructions

The vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage.RDo not tamper with the high-voltage compo-nents or the orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system.RDo not touch high-voltage components or theorange cables of the high-voltage electricalsystem when a vehicle has been involved in acrash.RNever touch damaged components or thedamaged orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system.RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltageelectrical system components that aremarked with a warning sticker.

General notes

Method of operationThe vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage bat-tery for driving. The high-voltage battery storesthe energy needed to operate the electric motorand releases it again.The electric motor uses energy that has beenstored in the high-voltage battery when pullingaway, accelerating and during the journey.In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted bymeans of energy recuperation into electricalenergy and stored in the high-voltage battery.Information on overrun mode (Y page 253).The high-voltage battery can be charged as fol-lows:Rthrough energy recuperationwhile the vehicleis in motionRthrough the combustion engine while drivingin CHARGE operating mode (Y page 243)Rwith the relevant charging cable at an electri-cal outlet while the vehicle is stationaryRat a wallbox while the vehicle is stationaryRat a charging station while the vehicle is sta-tionary

The high-voltage battery can be charged in anominal voltage range from 100 V to 240 V.You can view the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery in the multifunction display. Youcan find information in "PLUG-IN HYBRID oper-ation", section "Menus and submenus" under"Energy flow display" (Y page 245).

Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 181

Drivingandparking

Z

High and low outside temperaturesLow outside temperaturesAt very low outside temperatures the maximumpower output of the high-voltage battery may bereduced. The high-voltage battery is then nolonger able to provide the normal electricalpower output.High outside temperaturesTo prevent damage to the high-voltage batterydue to very high outside temperatures, the max-imum power output of the high-voltage batteryis reduced by the vehicle.

Energy consumption and electricalrangeThe maximum electrical range is generallyreduced by:Rhigh and low outside temperaturesRoperating the climate control systemRswitching on consumersThe battery's physical characteristics are suchthat leaving the vehicle parked for long periodsat low outdoor temperatures without charging itcan lead to:Ra reduction in battery performanceRlonger charge times

Notes on battery careAvoid storing or transporting the vehicle atexcessively high or low temperatures over a longperiod.If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary forlong periods:Rcheck the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery more oftenRconnect the vehicle to a power supplyThis prevents self-discharge and damage to thehigh-voltage battery.

Terms of usePlease note the information on exceptions andlimitations in warranty documentation and inthe Maintenance Booklet.

Handling the charging cable and charg-ing cable controlsDo not leave the charging cable controls(Y page 183) hanging loose from an electricaloutlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poorcontact with the electrical outlet and malfunc-tions when charging the vehicle.To ensure that the brackets within the chargingcable controls are not subjected to incorrectloads, observe the following:RNever lift or carry the controls by the chargingcable connector or the mains plug.RTo transport the charging cable, the chargingcable can be:- wrapped around the controls or- secured to the housing of the controls

Heat generated by the charging cableand charging cable connectorPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 180).During the charging process, the charging cableand charging cable connector may heat up.The charging cable and the charging cable con-nector will only heat up within the permissiblelimiting values, provided that:Rthe power supply and the charging cable arenot damagedRthe instructions for handling the chargingcable and controls on the charging cable areobserved

If the charging cable or charging cable connec-tor become too hot, have the mains power sup-ply checked.

Protection device against overvoltage! Overvoltage in the mains supply may dam-age the vehicle. For this reason, the vehicle isequipped with a protection device againstovervoltage in the mains supply. This devicemay be triggered during severe thunder-storms, for example, and may lead to the buil-ding's fuse being tripped and an interruptionin the power supply. These functions protectthe vehicle. After the building fuse is switchedon again, the charging process resumes auto-matically. Following an interruption in thepower supply or tripping of the building's fuse,it may take up to 10 minutes for charging toresume automatically.

182 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

Switch on the building protection system againafter it has been triggered. Otherwise, thecharging process cannot be continued.

General information about the chargingprocedurePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 180).The vehicle socket is located in the rear bumperon the right below the tail lamp.The charge socket flap and the vehicle are cen-trally locked or unlocked simultaneously.

Charging the high-voltage battery viathe electrical outlet

Charging cable for electrical outlets

Important safety notes! Only use the charging cable to charge thehigh-voltage battery. Do not use the chargingcable for other purposes. It may otherwise bedamaged.

The vehicle is supplied with a country-specificcharging cable for connection to amains socket.Only use the charging cable supplied with thevehicle or a charging cable approved for thevehicle.

i If you use the supplied 12 A charging cableto charge a high-voltage battery:Rthe charge time increases considerablyRelectrical consumption increases consider-ably

Where possible, charge the high-voltage bat-tery at a charging station (Y page 186). Onlythen can certified electrical energy consump-tion levels be reached.

i The charging process can vary depending onthe power supply. Therefore, always observethe local information.

Information about charging from a wallbox canbe found at (Y page 185).Information about charging at a charging stationcan be found at (Y page 186).

Stowing the charging cableThe charging cable can be stowed and held inplace in the bag provided in the trunk of thevehicle.

Controls on the charging cable

: On-board voltage indicator; Protective and indicator system display= Charge current indicator? Charge current setting buttonWhen displays: and; on the charging cablelight up, this means the following:

Display:

Lights upgreen

The on-board voltage is con-nected. The high-voltage bat-tery can be charged.

Flashes red The power supply from thebuilding is faulty.

Display;

Lights upgreen

There are no malfunctions.The high-voltage battery canbe charged.

Flashes red The protective and indicatorsystem has detected a mal-function due to an internalmalfunction. The high-voltagebattery cannot be charged.

If the control detects residual current or a mal-function, the charging process is halted. Oncethe malfunction has been rectified the chargingprocess is resumed automatically.For information on problems relating to thecharging process, see (Y page 187).

Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Setting the maximum charge currentG WARNINGIf the charge current draw via a mains socketis too high during the charging process, theexternal electrical system may overheat.There is a risk of fire.Before beginning the charging process, checkthe maximum permissible charge currentlocally. Consult a qualified expert to do sowhere necessary.If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings.

! An excessive charge current can blow a fuseor lead to overheating of the external powersupply. Check whether the external powersupply is compatible with the set charge cur-rent. If necessary, lower the set charge cur-rent or use another power socket.

Before starting the charging process at a powersocket, check the maximum permissible chargecurrent for the relevant power socket or thebuilding.You can set the maximum permissible chargecurrent:Ron the controls of the charging cableRin the on-board computer menu(Y page 272).

The lower value of the two charge current set-tings – on the charge cable controls and in theon-board computer – determines the maximumcharge current. If you cannot set the precisemaximum permitted charge current, select thenext lowest available value.Only set themaximumpermitted charge currentin the on-board computer menu if:Rit is not possible to set the charge current onthe charging cableRthe precise maximum permitted charge cur-rent can only be set via the on-board com-puter

How to set the maximum permissible chargecurrent on the charging cable, is described asfollows.X To adjust the setting: press button?repeatedly until the desired setting is selec-ted in display=.RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum settingRAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting

If, after the charging process, the charging cableis:Rleft connected to the power socket, the cur-rently selected valueswill be used for the nextcharging process.Rremoved from the power socket, the valueswill be reset to the minimum setting for thenext charging process. You may then need toreset the values of the maximum charge cur-rent.

i If the vehicle requires more time than usualwhen charging, check the maximum chargecurrent settings using the controls on thecharging cable or in the on-board computer'smenu.

Indicator lamp on the vehicle socketWhen the indicator lamp on the vehicle socketlights up, this means the following:

Indicatorlamp

Flashesorange

The connection between thevehicle and the currentsource is being establishedbefore charging begins.

Flashesgreen

The high-voltage battery isbeing charged.

Flashes red A malfunction has occurredwhile charging.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.

Lights uporange

A charging break for the high-voltage battery is takingplace.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.

Lights upgreen

The high-voltage battery isfully charged.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.

i If the indicator lamp is off, lock or unlock thevehicle. The indicator lamp then displays thecurrent status of the charging process again.

184 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

Connecting the charging cable

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in the directionof arrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Press fastener; to the left.Socket cap= is open.

X Insert the power supply plug into the electri-cal outlet to the stop.

X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-cle socket? to the stop.Indicator lampA first flashes orange andthen green.The high-voltage battery is being charged.

If the charging cable is connected to the vehicle,you cannot start the engine or move the vehicle.When the charging process begins, you can viewthe charging prediction in the Settings menuof the on-board computer. The charging predic-tion is either the anticipated condition of chargeat the programmed departure time or the timewhen the high-voltage battery will be fullycharged (Y page 272).

i Depending on the temperature, the fan andbattery cooling systemmay audibly switch onduring the charging process.

Removing the charging cableThe high-voltage battery is fully charged when:Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in themultifunction display (Y page 245)Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lightsup green after unlocking or locking the vehicle

X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable connector from the vehicle socket.

X Close socket cap=.X Close charge socket flap:.X Remove the mains plug from the mainssocket and safely stow away the chargingcable inside the vehicle (Y page 183).

Charging the high-voltage batteryfrom the wallbox

General notesIt is recommended that you charge your vehicleusing a wallbox or at a charging station.Make sure that themaximumcharging current isnot limited in the Settings menu of the on-board computer. You must select the maximumvalue if charging at a wallbox or a charging sta-tion (Y page 272).Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 180).

Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Connecting the charging cable

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in direction ofarrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Press fastener; to the left.Socket cap= is open.

X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-cle socket? to the stop.Indicator lampA first flashes orange andthen green.The high-voltage battery is being charged.

If the charging cable is connected to the vehicle,you cannot start the engine or move the vehicle.When the charging process begins, you can viewthe charging prediction in the Settings menuof the on-board computer. The charging predic-tion is either the anticipated condition of chargeat the programmed departure time or the timewhen the high-voltage battery will be fullycharged (Y page 272).

i Depending on the temperature, the fan andbattery cooling systemmay audibly switch onduring the charging process.

Removing the charging cableThe high-voltage battery is fully charged when:Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in themultifunction display (Y page 245)Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lightsup green after unlocking or locking the vehicle

X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable connector from the vehicle socket.

X Close socket cap=.X Close charge socket flap:.

Charging the high-voltage battery atthe charging stationBefore beginning the charging process at acharging station without communication capa-bilities, you must first activate the station, e.g.using an RFID card. Observe the on-site opera-tor instructions for the charging station.The connection for the vehicle at a charging sta-tion is identical to the connection on a wallbox(Y page 185).

186 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

Problems with the charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The charge socket flapcannot be opened.

The charge socket flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79).If the key battery is discharged:X Unlock the driver's door using the mechanical key (Y page 81).orX Unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside (Y page 86).

The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage batteryis not being charged.

The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket flashes red.A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the chargingprocess or during charging.X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socketand plug it back into the vehicle socket.

If the problem persists:X Have the mains socket checked for correct function or use anothermains socket.

orX Use a different charging station.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket does not light up.No connection can be established between the vehicle and the exter-nal power source.X Connect the charging cable once again.If the problem persists:X Have the mains socket checked for correct function or use anothermains socket.

orX Use a different charging station.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The charging cable con-nector cannot beremoved from the vehi-cle socket.

The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked.X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. Thesnap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked.

X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.If the snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked:X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector and tryto release the lock.

Online access to the vehicle

General information

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

i Operation of integrated information sys-tems and communications equipment inthe vehicle: you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.

Via the "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Home-page", you can call up remote query and remoteconfiguration functions for your vehicle. This is

possible from an Internet-enabled computer, aswell as many modern smartphones.Please call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) toobtain the relevant Internet address.Access to "My Mercedes Electric - VehicleHomepage" is dependent on the contractualperiods of mbrace. Activated access to thembrace emergency call system is required foruse.In order to use the "MyMercedes Electric - Vehi-cle Homepage ", you must agree to the localterms of use.Further information on supported devices, avail-able languages and contractual periods can beobtained from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.In order to call up the "Mercedes Electric - Vehi-cle Homepage", the vehicle must be connectedto the Internet (Y page 189).

Notes on data protectionBear in mind that the "My Mercedes Electric -Vehicle Homepage" offers access to your data.

188 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

i Prevent unauthorized persons fromaccessing this data.Every person who has access to the informa-tion stated can use the functions on the "MyMercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage".

i Information when selling a vehicle orbuying a used vehicle:RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged todelete the vehicle from your personal areaon the "My Mercedes Electric - VehicleHomepage".RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is pos-sible that the previous owner still hasaccess to the "MyMercedes Electric - Vehi-cle Homepage".

Calling up functionsThe "MyMercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage"allows you access to information about yourvehicle and its functions using remote query andremote configuration.The following functions can be accessed:Rrequest the current condition of charge of thehigh-voltage batteryRprogram the departure time (Y page 272)Rset or activate the "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" function (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions)

Information on additional functions and operat-ing instructions can be found on the "MyMercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage".

Connecting the vehicle to the Interneti This function is not available in all countriesand requires activated access to the mbraceemergency call system.

The "MyMercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage"can be used if the vehicle has a connection tothe Internet via a mobile phone network. Thenecessary data is transmitted by radio. The vehi-cle automatically recognizes whether a connec-tion to the Internet is possible or not. No presetsare necessary.

i Restrictions in reception are possible if thevehicle is in an underground car park, forexample. Restrictionsmay also occur in areaswith poor mobile network coverage.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartKey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Parking 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Using the SmartKeyX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition, the automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically.

If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Using the Start/Stop buttonX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 162)The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to SmartKey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.If you then open the driver's or front-passengerdoor, the automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergencywhile the vehicle is in motion by pressing andholding the Start/Stop button for three sec-onds. This function operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-offfunction.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

190 ParkingDrivingandparking

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a functiontest at regular intervals while the engine isswitched off. The sounds that can be heardwhilethis is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also be appliedwhen the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionaryRActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehiclestationary

In addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released automat-ically when all of the following conditions arefulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.

Parking 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe seat belt has been fastenedRyou depress the accelerator pedalIf the automatic transmission is in position R,the trunk lid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission positionP or you have previously driven faster than2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceleratorpedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parkingbrake will be released and the vehicle will startto move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake (Y page 190).The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater the brak-ing force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-sage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: observe the impor-tant safety notes for the high-voltage battery(Y page 374).

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-

192 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop . Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how eco-nomical your driving characteristics are. TheECO display assists you in achieving the mosteconomical driving style for the selected set-tings and prevailing conditions. Your drivingstyle can significantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccel.RConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percentageindicates a more economical driving style.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. A fixed percentage count in theECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-tion.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carried outusing the following three categories:

Driving tips 193

Drivingandparking

Z

RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro-cesses)- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior atall times)- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-ance of unnecessary acceleration anddeceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses)- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-ing your distance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle can coast withoutuse of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent brakingAn economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccel. and Constant,Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program EOn long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on thehighway, only the bar for Constant will change.The ECO display summarizes the driving char-acteristics from the start of the journey to itscompletion. For this reason, the bars changedynamically at the beginning of the journey. Onlonger journeys, there are fewer changes. Formore dynamic changes, carry out a manualreset.For further information on the ECO display, see(Y page 262).

Brakes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

194 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-sult a qualified specialist workshop inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP® systemoperates automatically. The engine and theignition must therefore be switched off (theSmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust bein position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brakeis tested on a brake dynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically. The engine andthe ignition must therefore be switched off(the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in theignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust bein position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested using abrake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 69)and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 69).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake disksand brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedbyMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brakedisks to which the wheel assembly with rim andthreaded connection is matched.The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrack width and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakediscs, such as when changing wheels, can leadto a reduction in comfort when driving with light-weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads onthe lightweight brake disks, particularly on thebrake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-

Driving tips 195

Drivingandparking

Z

sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wearwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tires have adequate tread depth

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speedRavoid rutsRavoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

196 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 386).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 386).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 386).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver incritical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewellthought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 68).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. Change into a lowergear in good time on long and steep downhill

gradients. This is especially important if thevehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. This relievesthe load on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.You can use cruise control if you want to drive ata steady speed for a prolonged period of time.You can store any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speed

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds. In the speedometer, the segmentsbetween the stored speed and the maximumspeed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press cruise the control lever for-wards: .

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUScannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou;, up: or down= .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down= for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down= fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, theDISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to thepreviously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically. Be ready to brake at alltimes.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the same way as cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles):DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you select the S drive program(Y page 173). Acceleration behind the vehicle infront or to the set speed is then noticeably moredynamic. If you have selected the E driving pro-gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently. Thissetting is recommended in stop-and-start traf-fic.AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC Plus supports asporty driving style when you select the S or Mdrive program (Y page 173). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speed isthen noticeably more dynamic. When you selectthe C drive program, the vehicle acceleratesmore gently. This setting is recommended instop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-cles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 205).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brake securesthe vehicle and relieves the service brake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also be shif-ted into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

Setting a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 204).

i Make sure that you maintain the minimumdistance to the vehicle in front as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian-gle; shows the stored speed.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up. The seg-ments likewise light up if a vehicle in front isdetected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 269) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistancegraphics display.X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 268).

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appearswhen the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 269) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistancegraphics display.X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 268).

You will see the stored speed for about five sec-onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you willsee the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the

multifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav-eling on a different line. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-cle in front on the edge of the road, because ofits narrow width. The distance to the vehicle infront will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS willnot brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi-cles that are crossing your lane. Activating

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossingtraffic, for example, could cause your vehicle topull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle inthe center of the driving lane by means of mod-erate steering interventions at speeds of0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the top ofthe windshield.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&GoPilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking intoaccount lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehi-cles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on detected lane mark-ings (left and right), and only on the vehicle infront if lane markings are missing.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support if these conditions do not exist.DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for thefunction to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotcan neither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. It cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and trafficconditions. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the road, your vehi-cle could come into contact with the curb orother road boundaries. Be particularly aware ofother road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directlynext to your vehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on the laneor projecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicleback to the lane. In such cases, you must steerthe vehicle yourself to ensure that it does notleave the lane.The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated again automatically after a lane changeis completed.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notesfor DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 200).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:Steering Assist. On message appears inthe multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-ted but not ready for a steering intervention,steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If thesystem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:Steering Assist. Offmessage appears inthe multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Further information on deactivating the HOLDfunction (Y page 209).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all of thefollowing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake. The HOLD function is then deactiva-ted.

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also be shif-ted into position P automatically.

MAGIC BODY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active BodyControl (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN as well asautomatic vehicle stabilization in the event of acrosswind.Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride heightto improve driving safety and reduce fuel con-sumption. The suspension mode is adjustedaccording to your selection (sports or comfort),the road surface conditions and the vehicle load.A multifunction camera detects bumps in theroad surface before the vehicle drives overthem. This reduces chassis movements.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine isswitched off. When parking, position yourvehicle so that it does not make contact withthe curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehi-cle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind AssistThe crosswind stabilization operates by chang-ing wheel loads through adjusting the ABCspring struts. It reduces impairments in handlingwhen driving in a straight line and assists duringcountersteering.

Crosswind Assist is active in the speed rangebetween 50 mph (80 km/h) and130 mph (210 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control ABC

Vehicle levelAll vehicles except AMG vehicles: dependingon the vehicle level that has been set, the vehi-cle automatically adjusts its height dependenton the current speed. The vehicle is lowered byup to 0.6 in (15 mm) as the speed increases. Asthe speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up tothe set vehicle height.AMG vehicles: depending on the vehicle levelthat has been selected, the vehicle automati-cally adjusts its height dependent on the currentspeed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.4 in(10 mm) below the normal level as the speedincreases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicleis raised up to the set vehicle height.Select the "Normal" setting for normal road con-ditions and "Raised" for drivingwith snow chainsor in particularly poor road conditions.

Setting the vehicle levelX To raise the vehicle: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To lower the vehicle: press button: again.Indicator lamp; goes out.

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Suspension tuningThe electronically controlled ABC suspensionsystem detects the vehicle level and the vehicleload and adjusts the setting accordingly. Youcan also choose between a particularly sporty ora comfortable tuning.

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The ABC suspension system is tuned individu-ally to each wheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fortRthe vehicle loadRthe force of the side windYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSPORT mode ensures even better contact withthe road. The steering response behavior issporty. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style on flat roads, e.g. on high-ways.Selecting the sports suspension settingX When indicator lamp; is off: press but-ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp;is on.Sports suspension tuning is selected.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: theActive Body Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspension Sys‐tem SPORT message appears in the multi-function display.

In COMFORT mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are especially comfortable. Thesteering response behavior is balanced. Selectthis mode if you favor a comfortable drivingstyle.Selecting the comfortable suspension settingX When indicator lamp; is off: press but-ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp;is on.Comfortable suspension tuning is selected.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles: theActive Body Control COMFORT messageappears in the multifunction display.AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspension Sys‐tem COMFORT message appears in the multi-function display.

ROAD SURFACE SCANi This function is not available in all countries.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitorsthe road in front of the vehicle using multifunc-tion camera: at the top of the windshield. Thisfunction is automatically active if you selectcomfort suspension tuning. The system isoperational at speeds of up to 81 mph(130 km/h).This function allows bumps in the road surfaceto be detected before the vehicle drives overthem. The spring struts are then actuated, withthe result that chassis movements are signifi-cantly reduced when driving over bumps.The system is deactivated when you select theraised vehicle level or sports mode.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthe road surface is insufficiently litRthere is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog orsprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or fromoncoming trafficRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered,for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of thecameraRthe road surface has no texture or is reflec-tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt,concrete slabs or puddlesRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

Rsections of the route have a very small radiusof curvatureRyou accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension with variabledamping for improved driving comfort. All-roundlevel control ensures the best possible suspen-sion and constant ground clearance, evenwith aladen vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle islowered automatically to improve driving safetyand to reduce fuel consumption. There is alsothe option to manually adjust the vehicle level.AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level controland the Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Normal"setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised"for driving with snow chains or on particularly

poor road surfaces. Your selection remainsstored even if you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to thenormal level.The Vehicle Risingmessage appears in themultifunction display.i The message disappears after ten seconds,irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed above approximately 75 mph(120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed above 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle levelX Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS auto-matically controls the calibration of the damp-ers.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

i You can choose between the sporty andcomfortable mode. One of the two modes isalways active.

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSPORT mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode when employinga sporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected. The vehicle is loweredby 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normallevel.The AIRMATIC SPORTmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles:X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If the drivingspeed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), thevehicle is automatically lowered by another0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal levelin sport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,select this mode if you favor amore comfortabledriving style. Select comfort mode also whendriving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Comfort tuning isselected.

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles: the AIRMATIC COMFORT messageappears in the multifunction display.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen‐sion System COMFORT message appears inthe multifunction display.

If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph(120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-ered in comfort mode by 0.4 in (10 mm) com-pared to the normal level.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences in thevehicle level by raising or lowering the axles.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-nently driven. Together with ESP®, it improvesthe traction of your vehicle whenever a drivewheel spins due to insufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if youuse winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chainsif necessary.

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 362).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in the instru-ment cluster. The warning display for the reararea is located on the headliner in the rear com-partment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read-iness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 362).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention and brake application can assist youduring parking and when exiting a parkingspace. You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 214).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable for park-ing, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 215) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections orloading ramps of goods vehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 214).

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain switched on until you acknowl-edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-ing thea button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist: pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill.

The Park Assist Active Select R ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Switched Off messageappears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicleis now parked. The vehicle is kept stationarywithout the driver having to depress the brakepedal. The braking effect is canceled when youdepress the accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,you must steer and brake again yourself.PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide, as the position of the vehicle mustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilst the

vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youwill drive out of the parking space.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Switched Offmessage appearsin the multifunction display. You will then haveto steer and merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take overthe steering, before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful, for

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

example when you recognize that it is alreadypossible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 215).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind thevehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdepends on the language setting. The follow-ing are examples of rear view camera displaysin the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering andparking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).The guide lines on the multimedia system showthe distances to your vehicle. The distances onlyapply to road level.

i The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 363).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media systemshows the area behind the vehi-cle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the handle inthe trunk lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 215), addi-tional measurement operational readiness indi-cator; appears in the multimedia system. Ifthe PARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in the multi-media system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

222 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

180° view

: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta 180° view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 215),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in themultimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active, warning displays; light upin the multimedia system in yellow or redaccordingly.

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

Object detectionThe rear view camera can detect moving andstationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrianor another vehicle is detected, these objects aremarked with bars. The system is only able todetect and mark stationary objects when yourvehicle is moving. When the vehicle is station-ary, moving objects can be detected andmarked.To ensure that you can use the function, it mustbe switched on in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting of fourcameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrorsThe cameras capture the immediate surround-ings of the vehicle. The 360° camera assistsyou, for instance when parking or at exits withreduced visibility.You can show images from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in six different split-screenviews on the multimedia system. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle. Thisview is calculated from the data supplied by theinstalled cameras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and images from the rear-facing sidecameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the forward-facingside cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the guide linesare hidden in the multimedia system.

When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will alsobe optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONICis activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperature

224 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 363)Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.The guide lines on the multimedia system showthe distances to your vehicle. The distances onlyapply to road level.The cameras in the front and in the rear area areeach protected by a flap. These flaps are openedwhen the 360° camera is activated. Observe thenotes on cleaning (Y page 363). For technicalreasons, the flaps may remain open briefly afterthe 360° camera has been deactivated.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Rthe multimedia system is switched onRthe 360° Camera function is switched oni If the 360° camera is activated at speedsabove approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), awarning message appears.The warning message disappears if:Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360° cam-era is then activated.Rthe message is confirmed with the%button.

Switching the 360° camera on and offusing the button

X To switch on: press button:.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image from thefront cameraRfull screen display with the image from therear view camera

X To switch off: press button: again.

Switching on the 360° camera andmul-timedia systemX Press theØ button in the center console.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select the 360° camera: turn and press thecontroller.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You

Driving systems 225

Drivingandparking

Z

see the top view of the vehicle and the imagefrom the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.Switching to full screen mode:X 180° View Turn and press the controller.i The 180° option is only available in the fol-lowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on the trunklidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steering

wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

226 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facingside camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side camera settingfor the rear-facing view.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

Driving systems 227

Drivingandparking

Z

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stoppedRwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe viewwhich was active before the 360° cam-era was displayed appears in the multimediasystem. You can also stop the 360° camera dis-play split-screen view by selecting the%symbol in the display and then confirming withthe COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving slower than37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assistof DISTRONIC PLUSRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessmentis deleted and restarted when continuing thejourney, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 269) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 268).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in abar display in five levels from high to lowRif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot issue a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 271).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

If Standard is selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attention levelis set to normal.If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Attention

228 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver iswarned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the assistance graphic display.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take aBreak!.In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If you donot take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con-tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutesat the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators offatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.If a warning is given in the multifunction display,the multimedia system offers a service stationsearch. You can select a service station andnavigation to this service station will then begin.This function can be activated and deactivatedin the multimedia system.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data and general traffic regulations stored inthe navigation system are used to determine thecurrent speed limit.Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, andfor this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected.

If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed from any of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 268).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Activating Traffic Sign AssistX Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display usingthe on-board computer (Y page 270).

If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist dis-play in the on-board computer, the traffic regu-lations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions)are displayed in the instrument cluster for fiveseconds respectively. The wrong-way warning

Driving systems 229

Drivingandparking

Z

and the traffic sign display for speed limits andovertaking restrictions remain active even whenthe display has been deactivated.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 268).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h(60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply.

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed; Additional signs for wet conditions

A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) applies inwet conditions and if TrafficSign Assist has determined that the restrictionmust be observed.

Canceling the speed limit

The speed limit no longer applies:.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driv-ing. It is generally neither shown on the trafficsign nor on the instrument cluster butmust betaken into account when observing the max-imum permitted speed.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by thenormal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus usesinfrared light to illuminate the road. Night ViewAssist Plus camera; picks up the infrared lightand displays a monochrome image in the multi-function display. The image shown in the displaycorresponds to a road lit up by high-beam head-lamps. This enables you to see the road's courseand any obstacles in good time. When pedes-trian recognition is active, pedestrians recog-

230 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

nized by the system are visually highlighted incolor in the Night View Assist Plus display withsmall frame corners.In addition, an infrared camera is integrated intothe radiator trim:. The camera helps detectpedestrians and animals. Observe the notes oncleaning the infrared camera (Y page 364).

i Infrared light is not visible to the human eyeand therefore does not glare. Night ViewAssist Plus can therefore remain switched oneven if there is oncoming traffic.

Important safety notesNight View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving. Do not rely onthe Night View Assist Plus display. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking in goodtime. Drive carefully and always adapt your driv-ing style to suit the prevailing road and trafficconditions.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered,for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of thecameraRthe infrared camera in the radiator trim isdirty, fogged up or obscuredRon bends, hilltops or downhill gradientsRat high outside temperaturesNight View Assist Plus cannot display objectsdirectly in front of or beside the vehicle.It is possible that, in addition to people and ani-mals, other objects are also marked or highligh-ted .

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notesPedestrian or animal recognition may beimpaired or inoperative if:Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirelyobscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehi-clesRthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the ani-mal in the Night View Assist Plus display isincomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerfullight reflections

Rpedestrians or animals do not contrast withthe surroundingsRthe camera system no longer recognizespedestrians as persons due to special cloth-ing or other objectsRpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g.sitting, squatting or lyingRanimals are not recognized by the system,e.g. because of their size or shape

Pedestrian and animal recognition is deactiva-ted at temperatures above 90 ‡ (32 †). Thespotlight function and automatic delayedswitch-off are then no longer active.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian rec-

ognition= Highlighting? Pedestrian recognizedNight View Assist Plus can recognize pedes-trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the bodycontours and posture of a person standingupright.Pedestrian recognition is then switched on auto-matically if:RNight View Assist Plus is activated.Ryou are driving faster than approximately6 mph (10 km/h).Rit is dark.If pedestrian recognition is active, readinesssymbol; appears. Persons who are detectedare highlighted by framing=. If the pedestrianrecognition system has brought a pedestrian toyour attention, look through the windshield toevaluate the situation. The actual distance toobjects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accu-rately by looking at a screen.

Driving systems 231

Drivingandparking

Z

Animal recognitionAnimals can be recognized in the following sit-uations:RdarknessRoutside built-up areasRbelow an ambient temperature of 90 ‡(32 †).

Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger ani-mals such as deer, cows or horses using typicalcharacteristics.The system does not detect:Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and catsRanimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec-ognizable

When detected, animals are marked with smallcolor frame corners. In contrast to pedestrianrecognition, there is no separate readiness sym-bol in the multifunction display.

Activating/deactivating Night ViewAssist Plus

Activation conditionsYou can only activate Night ViewAssist Plus if allof the following conditions are met:Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 162) or theengine has been started.Rthe light switch is in theà or L posi-tion.Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

X Press button:.The Night View Assist Plus display appears inthe multifunction display.

i The infrared headlamps only switch on in thedark from speeds of approximately 6 mph(10 km/h). This means that you do not have

the full visual range while the vehicle is sta-tionary and cannot check whether Night ViewAssist Plus is working. The infrared head-lamps are deactivated at speeds below 3mph(5 km/h). The Night View image continues tobe displayed until you deactivate it by press-ing button:.

Automatic activationYou can select the Night View Assist Auto‐matic Activation option via the Night ViewAssist menu. The pedestrian and animal searchfunction remains active even when the NightView image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlitsurroundings and at speeds of more than60 km/h, the Night View image is automaticallydisplayed in themultifunction display as soon aspedestrians or animals are detected.X In the assistancemenu, select automatic acti-vation of Night View Assist Plus(Y page 270).

Deactivating Night View Assist PlusX Press button:.The Night View Assist Plus display disappearsfrom the multifunction display. Night ViewAssist is deactivated.

Spotlight function

General notesUnder certain conditions, the spotlight functionuses the headlamps to flash at detected pedes-trians.The spotlight function is only active if:Rpedestrian recognition is activeRthe road surface is not litRthe driving speed is at least 40 mph(60 km/h)Rthe "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" func-tion is activated (Y page 133)

The spotlight function is not active or is activeonly to a limited extent if:Ryou are driving in city trafficRthere are pedestrians located in the area of anoncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight functionThe pedestrian detection with spotlight functionis running the background. If the prerequisitesare met, the spotlight function uses the head-

232 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

lamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestriandetected on or near to the road surface.X In the lightmenu, select the spotlight functionof Night View Assist Plus (Y page 274).

The spotlight function does not flash at animals.

Display in the assistance graphic

Pedestrian symbol: in the assistance graphicindicates the status of the spotlight function. Ifthe symbol is displayed not filled in, the functionis switched on. If the symbol is displayed filledin, the conditions for the spotlight function aremet.Displaying the assistance graphicX Select the Assistance Graphicmenu usingthe on-board computer (Y page 268).

Driving systems 233

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The picture quality ofNight View Assist Plushas deteriorated.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.X Fold down camera cover (Y page 364).X Defrost the windshield (Y page 151).

The windshield is iced up.X De-ice the windshield (Y page 151).

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 136).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a carwash.X Clean the windshield (Y page 362).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.X Replace the windshield.

The pedestrian and ani-mal recognition is notavailable.

the infrared camera in the radiator trim is dirtyX Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Driving Assistance PLUS package consistsof DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 199), Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 234) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 237).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,to monitor the area to the sides of the vehiclewhich the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-play in the exterior mirrors draws your attentionto vehicles detected in the monitored area. Ifyou then switch on the corresponding turn sig-nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti-cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-sion is detected, corrective braking may helpyou avoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-uates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind

Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-sors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-

234 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging cargo. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the inner edge ofyour lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Driving systems 235

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 20mph (30 km/h).Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind SpotAssist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display. Above a speed of20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar wavesin the assistance display changes to green;.Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You will then hear a double warning

tone and redwarning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display; underlining the danger of a side col-lision appears in the multifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-cor-recting brake application may be interrupted atany time by countersteering slightly or acceler-ating.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

236 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 271).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-

tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in a speed rangebetween 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take account ofroad and weather conditions. It may not recog-nize traffic situations. Active Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the camera

Driving systems 237

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpersor the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured bysnowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andbroken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor-recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanesRyou cut the corner on a bend

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns

you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-cle speed.A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognized asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

238 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.Ran obstacle in the lane inwhich you are drivinghas been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmay not detect otherroad users or traffic situations. An inappropriatebrake applicationmay be interrupted at any timeif you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keep‐ing Assist Onmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display. If all conditions have beensatisfied, a warning or steering interventionmay be made.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 268) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneKeeping Assist Off message appears inthe multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssist menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist function (Y page 271).

X Select Standard or Adaptive.When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanesRyou cut the corner on a bend

Driving systems 239

Drivingandparking

Z

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation

Points to remember

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor. In HYBRID mode, the hybriddrive systemautomatically selects themost effi-cient operating mode for every driving situation.Drive the vehicle in the usual manner.To save fuel in HYBRID mode, the hybrid drivesystem switches off the combustion engine asoften as possible during the journeywhen poweroutput requirements are low. When power out-put requirements are low, the electric motorpowers the vehicle. The combustion engine isautomatically activated when power outputrequirements are high. The engine is usuallyswitched off when the vehicle is stationary. Con-sequently, there is usually no engine idling aswith combustion engine vehicles.For pulling away and accelerating, the electricmotor supports the internal combustion engineusing the power stored in the high-voltage bat-tery. In addition, the power is used for partiallyelectric driving, operation of the electric coolantcompressor and to support the 12 V on-boardelectrical system. In this way the hybrid drivesystem helps to reduce your vehicle's fuel con-sumption.Observe the driving tips on PLUG-IN HYBRIDoperation (Y page 251).

Recuperative Brake SystemIf you release the accelerator pedal when thevehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation is ini-tiated. The electric motor is operated as a gen-erator when in overrun mode and when youbrake. Hybrid technology converts the kineticenergy of the vehicle into electricity and storesit in the high-voltage battery.Observe the important safety notes for theRecuperative Brake System (Y page 44).

Important safety notesIf the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you open the driver's door:Ra message appears in the multifunction dis-play andRa warning tone soundsFurther information (Y page 297).All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe combustion engine is switched off andRthe READY indicator in the instrument clusterlights up

If you remove your foot from the brake pedalwhile in transmission position D or R, the vehiclemay pull away automatically.Observe the notes on the READY display of theECO start/stop function (Y page 252).Vehicles with an electric motor generate muchless driving noise than vehicles with internalcombustion engines. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users in certainsituations.Depending on the vehicle's equipment andcountry-specific regulations, the vehicle can beequipped with Acoustic Vehicle Indication.Acoustic Vehicle Indication generates a certainsound at a speed between 0 and 19 mph(30 km/h). This helps other road users, partic-ularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear yourvehicle better. The sound can also be heardinside the vehicle.The volume depends on the engine speed. Thefaster you accelerate, the louder the sound is. Ata speed of over 19 mph (30 km/h) the sound isswitched off. Above this speed, the naturalsounds from the vehicle are sufficient that it canbe heard in good time by other road users.

240 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Hybrid system overview

: 12 V battery; Transmission with electric motor= Electric heater? High-voltage electrical system cablesA High-voltage batteryB Recuperative Brake SystemC Electric refrigerant compressorD Vehicle socketE ChargerF Voltage transformerG Power electronicsYou can switch off the hybrid drive system manually. For further information on the high-voltageswitch-off device, see (Y page 42).

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 241

Drivingandparking

Z

Instrument cluster

: Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (Y page 315); Electric motor performance display (Y page 242)= Condition of charge display for high-voltage battery (Y page 245)? Driving mode display (Y page 243)A Electrical range

Displays and operation

Electric motor performance display

The power display for the electric motor is loca-ted on the right-hand side of the instrumentcluster.The current condition of charge of the high-volt-age battery is shown as a percentage in condi-tion of charge displayA. 100% corresponds tothe highest possible charge level of the high-voltage battery.

There are two further areas located to the leftand right of condition of charge displayA:RArea: to; (E-DRIVE):This shows the electric output from the elec-tric motor, e.g. during electric operation or inboost mode.When the motor is switched on, the display isat lower limit;. With increasing pressure onthe accelerator pedal the display fills upfrom; to:.Driving with the electric motor: when thedisplay reaches upper limit:, the combus-tion engine is switched on. If the display isapproaching upper limit: and you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, the dis-play empties again. The combustion engine isnot switched on. At low speeds, you canthereby control the electric operation usageso that you only drive in electric mode.Driving with the combustion engine: theelectric motor supports the combustionengine by providing additional torque (boostmode) until the display reaches upperlimit:.

242 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

You can also select the operating mode of thehybrid drive system (Y page 243).RArea= to? (CHARGE):This shows the recuperated energy which isstored in the high-voltage battery as electricalenergy.When the display reaches lower limit?, themaximum recuperative braking power hasbeen exhausted. The mechanical brake isactivated.

Selecting the operating mode

Button: allows you to choose between differ-ent operating modes.X Press button: to change the operatingmode.The operating mode selected appears in theinstrument cluster (Y page 242).If it is not possible to change operatingmodes, the display message Change thecurrent drive program before chang‐ing the operating mode. or Exit man‐ual drive program M before changingthe operating mode. appears in the multi-function display. Further information on "Dis-play messages" (Y page 297).

: Operating mode selected; Operating mode unavailable= Operating mode available

HYBRID RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal combus-tion engine is possibleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe high-voltage batteryis discharged to approx-imately 20%RTo subsequently main-tain the condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery, the electricoutput is reduced. Allvehicle functions such aselectric mode, energyrecuperation or boostmode, for example, arestill available.

E-MODE RElectric-only operationmode up to the outputlimit of the electric motorRElectrical power outputallotted using the hapticaccelerator pedal(Y page 251)RInternal combustionengine activation usingthe haptic acceleratorpedalRThe power meter isshown on the right-handside of the instrumentcluster (Y page 244).

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 243

Drivingandparking

Z

E-SAVE RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal combus-tion engine is possibleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe current condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery is maintainedso the electrical energycan be used at a latertime.

CHARGE RElectric drive is not pos-sibleRThe high-voltage batteryis charging while drivingwith the combustionengine

In automatic drive program S (Y page 250) andin manual drive program M (Y page 250), onlyHYBRID operating mode is available.If you switch from automatic drive program S toautomatic drive program E or E+,HYBRID oper-ating mode continues to be selected.If manual drive program M is deactivated, theautomatic transmission shifts:Rinto the automatic drive program thatwas lastselectedRinto the driving mode that was last selectedEach time the engine is started, HYBRID modeis automatically selected.

Power meterThe power meter supports you in electric modeand displays the output obtained.If you select the E-MODE operating mode, theinstrument cluster will display the power meterinstead of the tachometer.

i The tachometer appears again if:Ryou select HYBRID, E-SAVE or CHARGERthe current state of charge of the high-volt-age battery is too low to drive the vehicle inthe E-MODE electrical operating mode

The power meter is divided into the followingareas:RLimit: (OFF):If the needle reaches limit:, the electricmotor and the combustion engine areswitched off.RArea; to? (CHARGE):This shows the recuperated energy which isstored in the high-voltage battery as electricalenergy.The more recuperated energy the high-volt-age battery has, the further needle? travelsin direction=. When the needle reaches limit=, the maximum amount of recuperativebraking power has been reached.In addition to the recuperative braking power,the mechanical brakes are activated in thearea between; and=.ROutput range of electric motor:? toA:The electric output of the electric motor isdisplayed here.When the powermeter needlereaches position?, the electric motor isoperational. With increasing pressure on theaccelerator pedal, the needle moves towardsA.The output limit of the electric motorA canbe felt via the additional pressure point in thehaptic accelerator pedal.If you do not press the haptic acceleratorpedal beyond the pressure point, you cancontrol electric operation, at low speeds, toonly drive in electric mode.ROutput range of combustion engine:A toB:The output of the combustion engine and theelectric motor is displayed here. When thepower meter needle reaches positionA andyou press the haptic accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point, then the combus-tion engine is switched on.

244 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

The electric motor supports the combustionengine by providing additional torque when:Rthe needle has exceeded areaARyou press the haptic accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point and want to obtainmore power

Operating the on-board computerYou can display the current operating conditionof the hybrid drive system in the multifunctiondisplay and the multimedia system display(Y page 245).In the multimedia system display, you can alsocall up a graphic display of the fuel consumptionand generated electricity (Y page 249).

Menus and submenus

Selecting displays in the display of themultimedia systemX Press buttonØ on the controller.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Energy Flow: turn and press thecontroller.The energy flow is displayed.

orX To select Consumption: turn and press thecontroller.Fuel consumption and the generated electricenergy are displayed.

X To exit the display: press the% button onthe controller.

Selecting the energy flow display in themultifunction displayX UseÑ on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Select Energy Flow with: or9 .The active hybrid components are highlightedin the energy flow display.

Energy flow display

Overview

: Internal combustion engine; Electric motor= High-voltage battery condition of charge? High-voltage batteryA Energy flowThe active hybrid components are highlighted.The energy flow is indicated by arrows. Thearrows have a different color depending on theoperating state.

Automatic engine switch-off

The engine and electric motor are switched off.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery is shownwhen the SmartKey is in position2in the ignition lock.

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 245

Drivingandparking

Z

Engine running while vehicle is stationary

The combustion engine is running while thevehicle is stationary. The high-voltage battery isnot being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The combustion engine is highlighted.

Charging while vehicle is stationary

The engine powers the electric motor. The elec-tric motor operates as a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged.The arrow representing energy flow is shown inwhite.

Driving using the engine

The engine powers the vehicle.

The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.

Driving using the engine plus boost mode

If you rapidly depress the accelerator, the elec-tric motor supports the internal combustionengine by providing additional torque.The arrows for the energy flow are shown in red.

Driving using the engine plus energyrecovery

The engine powers the vehicle. The electricmotor is operating as a generator, e.g. in over-run mode and when braking (Y page 253). Thekinetic energy of the vehicle is converted intoelectrical energy. The high-voltage battery isbeing charged.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

246 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Driving using the internal combustionengine and charging the high-voltage bat-tery

The engine powers the vehicle. The engine alsopowers the electric motor. The electric motoroperates as a generator. The high-voltage bat-tery is being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.

Driving using the internal combustionengine and discharging the high-voltagebattery

The engine powers the vehicle. If the vehicle isapproaching a downhill gradient with a highpotential for energy recuperation, the conditionof charge of the high-voltage battery is inten-tionally kept low or intentionally reduced.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.Further information on the route-based operat-ing strategy (Y page 253).

Electric operation mode

The electric motor powers the vehicle. The high-voltage battery supplies energy to the electricmotor.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

Electric operation mode and charging thehigh-voltage battery

The electric motor is operating as a generator,e.g. in overrun mode and when braking(Y page 253). The kinetic energy of the vehicleis converted into electrical energy. The high-voltage battery is being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 247

Drivingandparking

Z

Charging the high-voltage battery whenstationary

The engine and electric motor are switched off.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery via:Ra mains socket (Y page 183)Ra charging station (Y page 186)Ra wallbox (Y page 185)

Displaying the total range and electricalrange

The approximate range is based on the currentdriving style.X UseÑ on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the approximatetotal range and electrical range.

248 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Displaying fuel consumption and generated electricity

: Fuel consumption; Electrical energy generatedEvery bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute.Fuel consumption indicator:may differ from the indicator in the From Start trip computer in theTrip menu.To reset the values: the values are reset along with the From Start trip computer (Y page 262).X To select Consumption: turn and press the controller.Fuel consumption: and electrical energy; generated for the last 15minutes are shown in theCOMAND display.

Starting the engineThe vehicle starts in electric mode without theinternal combustion engine (noiseless start).The internal combustion engine starts only afterthe power demanded by the driver exceeds theavailable power that the electric motor can cur-rently provide.Noiseless start operation is dependent on theoutside temperature and the operating temper-ature of the internal combustion engine. If not allconditions for noiseless start operation are ful-filled, the vehicle starts with the internal com-bustion engine. X Switch on the ignition.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Observe the notes on starting the engine(Y page 164).

X Start the vehicle (Y page 164).The vehicle is operational when READY indi-cator: lights up.

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 249

Drivingandparking

Z

Pulling awayX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X If the Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'display message appears in the multifunctiondisplay, depress the brake pedal more firmlyand select the desired transmission position.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.For further information on pulling away(Y page 165).

Driving

Program selector button

Automatic drive programs E, S and E+

X Press program selector button: to changethe drive program.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving characteris-tics.

E Economy RComfortable, economicaldrivingRElectric operation modeis used as often as possi-bleRECO start/stop functionis available

S Sport RSporty driving style withboost modeRThe internal combustionengine is alwaysswitched on

E+ EconomyPlus

RComfortable, economicaldrivingRElectric operation modeis used as often as possi-bleRThe ECO start/stop func-tion is availableRDouble pulses in the hap-tic accelerator pedal, asan indication to releasethe accelerator pedal(Y page 251)RAfter the acceleratorpedal has been released,the coasting characteris-tics of the vehicle areadapted to the trafficconditions

For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 174).

Manual drive programIn addition to automatic drive programs E and S,you can switch tomanual drive programM usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.In manual drive program M, you can brieflychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D. In manual drive program M theinternal combustion engine is always switchedon.

250 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Activating when driving with the electric motor:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 174).The combustion engine is switched on. Man-ual drive programM is temporarily activated.The selected gear andM appear in the multi-function display.

Activating when driving with the combustionengine:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 174).Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear andM appear in themultifunction display.

The ECO start/stop function is not available inmanual drive program M.

Haptic accelerator pedal

General notesThe haptic accelerator pedal helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissions ofyour vehicle.There are two different functions available forthis purpose:Ran additional point of resistance in E-MODEoperating mode (Y page 243)Ra double impulse in E+ operating mode(Y page 250)

Additional point of resistance in the hap-tic accelerator pedalThe maximum available electric performance isindicated by a tangible point of resistance in thehaptic accelerator pedal.The additional point of resistance is available inE-MODE operating mode (Y page 243).If you depress the haptic accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point, the combustionengine is switched on.

Double pulses in the haptic acceleratorpedalA tangible double pulse in the haptic acceleratorpedal gives you a recommendation to releasethe accelerator pedal. The combustion enginecan switch off and be disconnected from thedrive train (overrun mode).The double pulse is available in drive programE+(Y page 250).

After the accelerator pedal has been released,the coasting characteristics of the vehicle areadapted to the traffic conditions.To avoid getting too close to the vehicle in front,you must apply the brakes manually when nec-essary.

Driving tips

General driving tipsDrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent andsudden acceleration as well as abrupt braking.During partial electric driving, pulling away andacceleration, the electric motor supports theinternal combustion engine.During overrun in transmission position D andbraking, the electric motor will operate as a gen-erator.Further information on the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 252).Additional driving tips (Y page 192).

Stationary vehicleIf the vehicle is stopped, the combustion engineis, for the most part, switched off. Automaticclimate control continues to function. The elec-tromechanically assisted steering gear allowsyou to use the power steering without reducedcomfort.

AccelerationDepending on the operating mode, pulling awayand driving under low load conditions are per-formed:Rentirely by electric propulsionRin combination with the internal combustionengine

When accelerating at an increased or full load,boost mode is utilized. The electric motor sup-ports the internal combustion engine by provid-ing additional torque when the accelerator isdepressed rapidly.

Overrun mode or brakingThere are three possible operating modes whenthe hybrid vehicle is decelerating:Renergy recovery takes place even when thevehicle is decelerating purely in overrunmode(Y page 240). The electric motor operates as

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 251

Drivingandparking

Z

a generator and stores the recovered energyin the high-voltage batteryRwhen the brakes are applied lightly, the vehi-cle is slowed down further by the electricmotor. This increases the energy recoverytaking place (Y page 240). The electric motoroperates as a generator and stores the recov-ered energy in the high-voltage batteryRwhen the brakes are applied with greaterforce, the service brakes are also used to slowthe vehicle down. The two systems worktogether

Urban drivingEnergy is recuperated during frequent deceler-ation and stopping in city traffic.The vehicle can be driven by the electric motoralone up to a speed of approximately 81 mph(130 km/h).The vehicle is driven by the electric motor aloneonly when all conditions for the automaticengine switch-off are fulfilled.Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 252).

Driving on inter-urban roadsThe following phases are possible when drivingon inter-urban roads:Rrapid acceleration (boost mode)Rconstant energy consumptionRenergy recuperationRelectric operation modeA great deal of recovered energy may be avail-able, depending on the route profile. Thisreduces consumption and emissions.

Highway drivingDuring highway driving, fuel consumption andemissions are favorably influenced in particularby reduced power losses.The internal combustion engine will be switchedoff automatically, if:Rthe driver removes his or her foot from theaccelerator pedal in drive program E and aspeed of 81 mph (130 km/h) is not exceededRthe driver removes his or her foot from theaccelerator pedal in drive program E+ and aspeed of 112 mph (180 km/h) is not excee-ded

Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 252).

ECO start/stop function

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches the inter-nal combustion engine off automatically whenthe vehicle stops moving and at high speeds(Y page 253).All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. the auto-matic climate control.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive programsE andE+. Electric-only operationis only possible in drive programs E and E+.Additional information for drive programs E andE+ (Y page 250).

Automatic engine switch-offThe engine is switched off automatically, includ-ing when:Rthe driver removes his or her foot from theaccelerator pedal in drive program E and aspeed of 81 mph (130 km/h) is not exceeded(Y page 253)Rthe driver removes his or her foot from theaccelerator pedal in drive program E+ and aspeed of 112 mph (180 km/h) is not excee-ded (Y page 253)Rthe engine has reached its operating temper-atureRthe driver’s seat belt is fastened and thedriver’s door is closedRthe driver only slightly depresses the accel-erator pedal in order to, for example, maintainthe current speed for a limited distanceRthe hood is closed and engaged properlyRthe high-voltage battery is charged suffi-cientlyRno malfunctions are present in the hybriddrive system

The internal combustion engine will not beswitched off automatically, if:Rthe self-diagnosis function of the engine con-trol unit is still activeRthere is a malfunction in the hybrid drive sys-temRthe climate control of the vehicle requires itRthe high-voltage battery is being charged(Y page 246)Rautomatic emissions tests are running

252 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Automatic engine startThe automatically switched-off internal combus-tion engine starts automatically in certain situa-tions, if:Rthe power demand from the driver via theaccelerator pedal is greater than the electricmotor alone can provideRthe driver switches to drive program S or MRthe condition of charge of the high-voltagebattery has reached the lower limitRthe settings of the automatic climate controlrequire it, e.g. at external temperatures above30 †

Overrun modeIn overrun mode, the combustion engine isswitched off and is disconnected from the drivetrain. The electric motor:Rgenerates low thrust, which corresponds tothe overrun mode of an active combustionengineRfunctions as a generator and produces thenecessary energy for the auxiliary consumersand charges the high-voltage battery

Overrun mode is possible in the following speedrange:Rin drive program E below 81 mph (130 km/h)Rin drive program E+ below 112 mph(180 km/h)

In drive program E+, after the accelerator pedalhas been released the coasting characteristicsof the vehicle are adapted to the traffic condi-tions. Further information about the hapticaccelerator pedal (Y page 251).

Route-based operating strategyFor the route-based operating strategy, the sys-tem factors in information about the expectedroute when route guidance is active.The information on the route is provided by themultimedia system and includes the following:Rroad categoriesRspeed limitationsRdata on downhill gradients

The use of electric energy is automatically opti-mally distributed from the beginning to the endof the journey, using information about theroute. The distribution is pre-emptive and takesinto consideration:Rthe sections of the journey aheadRthe energy consumption on the whole routeThe condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery is thus systematically controlled. In addi-tion, the control function takes into accountthat:Rthe fuel savings through the use of electricalenergy can vary, depending on the route (e.g.urban, interurban or highway)Rthe use of electrical energy is held available inparticular for electric operation (e.g. urbanroutes)

The vehicle thus automatically selects the opti-mum driving mode for the respective section ofthe route.The route-based operating strategy is availableunder the following conditions:Rdrive program E+ is selectedRHYBRID driving mode is selectedRactive route guidance is activatedRsuitable map data is availableWhen the route-based operating strategy isbeing used, the area in front of the vehicle isshown as green in the multifunction display.

ParkingX Apply the electric parking brake.The red! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.The READY indicator in the instrument clustergoes out.

Further information on parking and switching offthe internal combustion engine (Y page 190).

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 253

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Internal combustion engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You cannot start theinternal combustionengine. The multifunc-tion display shows nodisplay messages. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display isoff.

For example, self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybrid drivesystem is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Try to start the internal combustion engine again.If the internal combustion engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You wish to pull away,but the ECO start/stopfunction does not startthe internal combustionengine. The READY indi-cator in the multifunc-tion display is off.

The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster light up.X Shift the transmission to P.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Start the engine.

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Recuperative Brake System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Braking resistance isreduced and brake pedaltravel is longer thanusual.

G Risk of accidentThe Recuperative Brake System is malfunctioning.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 277).

X Observe the information regarding indicator and warning lamps inthe instrument cluster (Y page 315) .

254 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Hybrid drive system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The hybrid drive systemhas been switched offautomatically.

You have been in an accident.The hybrid drive system remains switched off if:Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a fewseconds.Rthe red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument clus-ter is lit.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The hybrid drive systemhas been switched offautomatically. The multi-function display alsoshows a display mes-sage.

An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid drive systemor anelectrical connection has been disconnected.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 277).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 255

Drivingandparking

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so andconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. The

operating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe light sensor in the instrument cluster auto-matically controls the brightness of the multi-function display. In daylight, the displays in theinstrument cluster are illuminated. A dimmingfunction is not possible in daylight.The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted using the brightness control knob.The brightness control is located between theinstrument cluster and the multimedia systemdisplay (Y page 35).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If you turn the light switch (Y page 130) to theT,Ã or L position, the brightnesswill depend upon the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles: if you select the oper-ating mode E-MODE, the display in the instru-ment cluster changes from tachometer to powermeter (Y page 242).

256 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 258).There is a short delay before a change in outsidetemperature is shown in the multifunction dis-play.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is above 257 ‡(125 †) do not drive any further. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

All vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles:the coolant temperature gauge is in the lowerarea of the tachometer (Y page 33).PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles: themultifunction dis-play shows the coolant temperature in theCoolant submenu (Y page 269).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.Left control panel

ò ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the track or station list andselects a station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and selects aname or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold:RScrolls quickly through all listsRIn the Radio or Media menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the Telephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone book isopen

Displays and operation 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

a RIn all menus: confirms the selectedentry in the listRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the list of available radiosources or mediaRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and starts dial-ing the selected number

ñ RSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the Radio or Mediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list or listof available radio sources ormediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-tem (see the separate operatinginstructions)

Multifunction display

: Top status bar; Display= Bottom status barDisplay panel; shows the selected menu orsubmenu and display messages.X To open the menu list: press theò but-ton on the steering wheel.The menu list appears in display panel;.

Possible top status bar displays:R- -‡ Outside temperature (Y page 257)R# Turn signal, left (Y page 131)RL Low-beam headlamps (Y page 131)RK High-beam headlamps (Y page 132)RT Parking lamps and license plate lighting(Y page 131)R! Turn signal, right (Y page 131)Possible bottom status bar displays:Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 166)RREADY PLUG-IN HYBRID operation activated(Y page 249)RHYBRID Operating mode display in PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles, further displays(Y page 242)Rè Electric range (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles)Rë HOLD function (Y page 208)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 216)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus(Y page 133)Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot (Y page 207)R--- km/h Additional speedometer(Y page 274)

258 Displays and operationOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Head-up display

General notesThe head-up display projects information fromthe navigation system and the driver assistancesystem above the dashboard into the driver'sfield of vision. The head-up display allows thedriver to see all of the information without hav-ing to take their eyes off the road.A requirement for the display of the contents isthat the following functions are available in thevehicle and are switched on:RCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRTraffic Sign AssistRNavigation

Important safety notesThe head-up display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are notalways correctly displayed. Traffic signs alwayshave priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.The visibility of the head-up display is influencedby the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general ambient lightRsunglasses with polarization filtersRwet roadsRblocking of sunlight by objects on the displaycover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of thedisplay may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the head-up display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-ped with a special windshield. Should repairsbe necessary, have thewindshield replaced ata qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on/off

X Press button:.When the head-up display is switched on, thedisplay appears in the driver's field of vision.

Displays and operation 259

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Standard displays in the head-up displayThe head-up display shows the following contents and information.

: Navigation messages; Current speed= Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set speed? Detected traffic signs

AMG displays in the head-up displayAMG displays are only available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.The head-up display shows the following contents and information.

: Upshift indicator; Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually= Current engine speed? Current speed

260 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Setting optionsYou can adjust the following settings in thehead-up display submenu:Radjust the position of the head-up display onthe windshield (Y page 273)Radjust the brightness of the displays in thehead-up display (Y page 273)Rselect displays in the head-up display(Y page 273).Using the Display Content function, youcan, depending on your vehicle's equipment,choose between four standard displays. Theselected contents then appear in the head-updisplay.In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can alsochoose between two AMG displays. If youselect an AMG display, the head-up displayshows AMG-specific contents.If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assistappear in the head-up display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheel toopen the menu list.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 257).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 261)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 263)RRadio menu (Y page 265)RMedia menu (Y page 265)RTelephone menu (Y page 267)RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 268)RService menu (Y page 269)RSettings menu (Y page 269)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 275)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the menu displayscurrent fuel consumption;. In the subsequentmessage, the multifunction display shows theapproximate electrical range as well as the totalrange (Y page 248).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedisplay with approximate range: and cur-rent fuel consumption;.Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current driving

Menus and submenus 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

style and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyhas been recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.

ECO display

The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select ECODisplay.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 193).

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Odometer; Driving time= Average speed? PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: emission-free

trip distanceA Average fuel consumptionX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Select From Start or From Resetwith:or9.The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 263).In the following cases the trip computer isautomatically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.

262 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Digital speedometer

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and confirm witha.You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computer

R"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer arealso reset. If you reset the values in the "FromStart" trip computer, the values in the ECOdisplay are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can find fur-ther information on navigation instructions inthe separate operating instructions.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Navi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Menus and submenus 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane not recommended (dark gray)A Possible lane (light gray)B Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)On multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended?: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will only be able to com-plete the next change of direction in this lane.

Recommended laneB: in this lane you will beable to complete the next change of directionand the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection. The change of direction starts oncethe distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

264 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNew Route... orCalculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency range; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackA Genre

The multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The presetposition is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored. You can store radio sta-tions in the multimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently set station; appears in the multi-function display.

X To open the station list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list: pressthe: or9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold the: or9 button.

X To select the frequency range or stationmemory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select the frequencyrange or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information on radio operation can befound in the multimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

Media menu

Changing the media source

Menus and submenus 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You can change the media source and playbackmode (audio, video or TV) at any time in theMedia menu.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the following media sources,for example:RDisc (CD/DVD)RSD memory cardRMedia RegisterRUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® capable audio device

Please observe further information on mediasupport and media operation in the multimediasystem (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of current CD; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder name

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select an audio player or data carrier:pressa briefly.The list containing the media sourcesappears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.X To open the track list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous track in thetrack list: press the: or9 buttonbriefly.

X To select a track from the track list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9until the desired track is reached.If you press and hold the button, the speed ofrapid scroll increases after a short time. Notall audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If the corresponding track information is storedon the audio drive or audio media, the multi-function display may display the following:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information is not available in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

266 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select a DVD single drive or DVDmedia:pressa briefly.The list containing the media sourcesappears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.X To open the scene list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in thescene list: press the: or9 buttonbriefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐phone menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.

Menus and submenus 267

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the names oneafter the other.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer than onesecond.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.If you press and hold the: or9 buttonfor longer than five seconds, the nameappears with the next or previous letter initialletter in the alphabet.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one telephone num-ber for a particular name: press the6 ora button to display the numbers.

X Press: or9 to select the number youwant to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance graphic menu

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Assistance Graphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the statusof and/or information from other driving sys-tems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 199)RSpotlight function of Night View Assist Plus(Y page 274)

268 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

RDistance warning and the autonomousbraking function COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 71)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 234)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 228)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 237)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Service menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theService menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 277)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem (Y page 394)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 390)RCalling up the service due date (Y page 358).RDisplaying the coolant temperature (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles) (Y page 269)RChecking the oil level using the on-board com-puter (Y page 355) (only S 600, Mercedes-Maybach S 600 and Mercedes-AMG S 65models)

Displaying the coolant temperatureThe Coolantmenu is only available on PLUG‑INHYBRID vehicles.

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectCoolant.X Pressa to confirm the selection.The multifunction display shows the coolanttemperature in a bar display.

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu:RChanging assistance settings (Y page 269)RChanging HYBRID settings (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles) (Y page 272)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 273)RChanging the light settings (Y page 274)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 274)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 275)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" section inthe description of ESP® (Y page 73).

Menus and submenus 269

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFor further information about ESP®, see(Y page 73).X Start the engine.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to select ESP.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up continuouslywhen the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 317).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 278).

Automatic activation of Night View AssistPlusX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectNight View Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation isswitched on, the night vision image is automat-ically shown in the multifunction display if anobject is detected.For further information about Night View AssistPlus (Y page 232).

Activating/deactivating Traffic SignAssistUnder certain conditions, the Traffic SignAssist function allows you to choose if trafficsigns and messages should be displayed in thelower part of the speedometer.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectTraffic Sign Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.Traffic signs and messages appear in thelower part of the speedometer if the functionis activated.

For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,see (Y page 229).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

270 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the9 or: button to select Col‐lision Prevention.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu.For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 71).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the Assistance Graphic menu.For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see(Y page 75).

Activating/deactivating Active Blind SpotAssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,white radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the AssistanceGraphic.

For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 234).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST.X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: or9 to select Off, Standardor Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 228).

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping AssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Menus and submenus 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectLane Keeping Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection, Standard or Adap‐tive, appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 237).

HYBRID submenu (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles)

Setting the maximum charge currentUsing the Max. Charge Current function, youcan limit the charge current value at which thehigh-voltage battery should be charged.Before starting the charging process at a powersocket, check the maximum permissible chargecurrent for the relevant power socket or thebuilding.Only set the maximum permissible charge cur-rent using the function if:Rit is not possible to set the charge current onthe charging cableRthe precise maximum permitted charge cur-rent can only be set via the on-board com-puter

Before charging the high-voltage battery at awallbox or charging station, ensure that thecharging current is not limited by the function. Ifcharging at a wallbox or a charging station,select the maximum value.Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery and setting the charge current(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 181).X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Hybridsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press: or9 to select the Max.Charge Current function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Before charging the high-voltage battery, checkthemaximumpermissible charge current for therelevant power socket.Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 181).

Setting the departure timeYou can climatize the vehicle interior prior toyour departure with the "Set departure time"function. Further information on pre-entry cli-mate control (Y page 157).If you recharge the high-voltage battery, thefunction also displays the charging prediction.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Hybridsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DepartureTime function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X To set no departure time: press: or9 to select No Pre-selection.

X Pressa to confirm.If you recharge the high-voltage battery, themultifunction display also shows the timewhen the high-voltage battery will be fullycharged.

orX To set a departure time: press: or9A, B or C to select the desired preset.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

X Press: or9 to set the hours.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to set the minutes.X Pressa to confirm.If you recharge the high-voltage battery, themultifunction display shows the expected

272 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery for the departure time set.

Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 181).

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display= Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign AssistUsing the Display Content function, you canchoose from up to four display options depend-ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selectedcontents appear in the head-up display.InMercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choosebetween two AMG displays. If you select anAMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Display Con‐tent.X Pressa to confirm.A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired dis-play.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

For further information about the traffic signdisplays, see Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 229).Further information on navigation displays canbe found in the multimedia system; see the sep-arate operating instructions.

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the head-up dis-play on the windshield. You can compensate forheight differences if the seat positions arechanged, for example.X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 259).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Positionfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press: or9 to adjust the position to alevel from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the set position of the head-up display asa single memory preset (Y page 126).

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the head-up display is auto-matically adjusted to the surrounding ambientlight. You can also individually adjust the bright-ness of the head-up display.X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 259).X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Brightnessfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus 273

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Press: or9 to adjust the brightnessto a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5(dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Light submenu

Switching the spotlight function on/offX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lightssubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSpotlight function.X Press thea button to save the setting.When the spotlight function is activated, theassistance graphic shows the pedestriansymbol.

Further information on the spotlight function(Y page 232).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Lights sub-menu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol are shown in white in the multi-function display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 130).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer functionallows you to choose whether certain displaysappear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc-tion display.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RspeedometerRdigital speedometer in the Trip menuRadditional speedometer in the status area onthe multifunction displayThe unit in the additional speedometer is dis-played inversely to the selected distance unit.Rthe odometer and trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRnavigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go PilotRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offThe Additional Speedometer [km/h] func-tion allows you to choose whether the statusarea in the multifunction display shows thespeed digitally. The unit in the additional speed-ometer is always inverse to the speedometerunit.

274 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

Restoring the factory settingsX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected and confirmed Yes, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Transmission fluid temperatureA Engine oil temperatureX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine/transmission oil temperature:when the engine and transmission are at nor-mal operating temperature, oil tempera-ture? andA are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orA in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

Menus and submenus 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SETUP

: Drive program C, S or M; ESP® mode (ON/OFF)= Suspension setting SPORT or COMFORTX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button until theSETUP display appears.

276 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 208)RParking (Y page 189)

Hiding display messagesX Pressa or% on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority displaymessages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press theò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory.If there are no displaymessages, the No Messagesmessage appears in themultifunction display.When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷ and ! warninglamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

278 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsThere is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Cross-wind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and ActiveBlind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 279

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Cross-wind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and ActiveBlind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind SpotAssist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

280 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 190).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 190).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 190).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 281

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 406).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 190).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

282 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USAonly: the red$ brake systemwarning lamp also lights upwhilethe engine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 283

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsLimited See Opera‐tor's ManualPRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

284 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualAt least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systemsis temporarily restricted or inoperative:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.Possible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system isimpaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears. All driving systems and driving safety systems are oper-ative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 362):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

Check Left RearBelt See Operator'sManual or CheckRight Rear Belt SeeOperator's Manual

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The belt strap may be jammedin the belt tongue.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Release the jamming.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

Display messages 285

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt buckle extendermay be jammed.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Move the seat cushion forwards (Y page 107) and remove the causeof the jam.

X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt may be locked.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Completely take off your seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. There is not enough belt slackin the system.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Loosen the seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The assistance measuresspecified have been carried out. There is still a malfunction.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

286 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up inthe instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Perform the specified assistance measures when display messageCheck Left Rear Belt See Operator's Manual or CheckRight Rear Belt See Operator's Manual is shown(Y page 285).

If the display message does not disappear:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 287

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required orRight Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required

There is amalfunction in the left-hand or right-handwindow curtain airbag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

288 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 54).

Display messages 289

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamps light up simultaneouslyfor approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

290 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 54).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamphave failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐ing Light or CheckRight CorneringLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Low Beamor Check Right LowBeam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftTurn Signal orCheck Front RightTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorTurn Signal orCheck Right MirrorTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-tive.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeLamp or Check RightBrake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 291

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Center BrakeLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Tail andBrake Lamps orCheck Right Tailand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailLamp or Check RightTail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighBeam or Check RightHigh Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftParking Lamp orCheck Front RightParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup Light

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightSidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightSidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

292 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left DaytimeRunning Light orCheck Right DaytimeRunning Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

bSwitch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.X Turn the light switch to position L orÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Inoper‐ativeAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inop-erative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.

Display messages 293

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 356).

If you have to add coolant frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine coolingsystem checked.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 257‡ (125†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 257 ‡ (125 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.If the temperature increases again:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).

294 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRdefective power electronics (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Ra torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running

The battery charge level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running.X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

#Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance.The battery is being charged.

Display messages 295

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 353).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 355).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 353).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 355).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 353).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 355).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

296 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Hybrid drive system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

dVehicle OperationalSwitch the IgnitionOff Before Exiting

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display is on. A warning tone alsosounds.If you leave the vehicle:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey.If you do not leave the vehicle:X Switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. automatic climate control,seat heating.

Please note the following: the electrical consumers are supplied by the12 V battery. If the vehicle is left in a ready-to-drive state for an exten-ded period, it will switch off once the 12 V battery is almost empty. Itwill then only be possible to start the vehicle using a second battery(jump-starting).

Change the currentdrive programbefore changing theoperating mode. orExit manual driveprogram M beforechanging the operat‐ing mode.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:You have attempted to change the operating mode when in automaticdrive program S (Sport) or manual drive program M.X Activate the drive program E (Economy) or E+ (Economy Plus)(Y page 250).

X Select the preferred operating modeHYBRID, E-MODE, E-SAVE orCHARGE (Y page 243).

E-MODE CurrentlyUnavailablePLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped to thelower limit and the E-MODE operating mode has been switched off.Driving with the internal combustion engine is activated and the oper-ating mode switches to the basic HYBRID setting.X Continue driving using the internal combustion engine.You can switch to the E-SAVE or CHARGE operating mode asrequired (Y page 243).If you select CHARGE, the high-voltage battery is charged.Once the charge level display for the high-voltage battery hasincreased slightly, you can switch to the E-MODE operating modeagain.

Display messages 297

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only E-MODE Availa‐ble Power LimitedRefuel ImmediatelyPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel tank has been run dry and the combustion engine has beenswitched off.A warning tone also sounds.The vehicle will be powered by electrical energy only. Performance isrestricted and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly than normal.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.In the "Total range and electric range" menu, you can display theapproximate range of the vehicle (Y page 248).

Engine will notrestart ServicerequiredYou cannot start the engine again due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is running:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If you switch off the engine:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

áTowing Not Permit‐ted See Operator'sManual

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer to the near-est qualified specialist workshop.

ÛMalfunction ServiceRequired

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÛMalfunction

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Have the vehicle towed away by a professional recovery company tothe nearest qualified specialist workshop.

dMalfunction

The hybrid drive system is faulty.The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning.The drive power is restricted.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ïCharger Cable Con‐nected

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The charging cable connector is connected to the vehicle socket.You cannot drive off as long as the charging cable connector is stillconnected.Before you drive off:X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket(Y page 185).

298 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Please WaitDepressurizing Tank

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel filler flap unlocking button has been pulled. The fuel tankmustbe depressurized before refueling.X Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized and the fuel filler flap isunlocked.The opening process for the fuel filler cap may take up to 15minutes.

6Tank is Depressur‐ized Ready for Refu‐eling

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel tank is now depressurized. The vehicle may now be refueled.X Observe the information on refueling on the fuel filler flap.X Open the fuel filler cap and remove it (Y page 179).

6Tank VentilationMalfunction ServiceRequired

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:There is a malfunction in the fuel system.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ãAcoustic VehicleIndication Inopera‐tive

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The sound generator is not working. The vehicle can still be driven;however, no vehicle sounds can be generated. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, orit may not be heard at all.X Drivewith particular care, allowing for the possibility that other roadusers may behave unpredictably.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÀATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Display messages 299

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

¨Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-cle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC MalfunctionStop Vehicle The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the displaymessage disappears.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.The vehicle is leaking oil.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

300 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ABC Vehicle RisingPlease Wait Briefly The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle'shandling characteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Clean the windshield.

Active Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

Active Blind SpotAssist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 301

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with thedriver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 216).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 216).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbol isnot shown in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistSwitched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

Night View AssistCurrently Unavaila‐bleNight View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View AssistInoperative Night View Assist Plus is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

302 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Spotlight Inopera‐tive Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 208).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 199).

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 199).

Display messages 303

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 199).

304 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mphRA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam-ple.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 197).orX Reactivate ESP® (Y page 269).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 197).

Display messages 305

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire PressureSoon Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant lossin pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installednew wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 367).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-sure is correct (Y page 394).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorCanada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display messageand has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 394).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 390).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 392).

306 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 367).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 390).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 367).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Display messages 307

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling AwayThe driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

308 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cool‐ing

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarilyimpaired or not possible.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

Display messages 309

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

To view the ext.mirror, adjustfront-passengerseat or remove thehead restraint.

The front-passenger seat is in the chauffeur mode position and thehead restraint is folded down.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is the chauffeur mode position and thehead restraint is folded down, the view of the front-passenger exteriormirror can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Remove the head restraint on the front-passenger seat(Y page 113).

orX Move the front-passenger seat back into the normal position(Y page 111).

Front-PassengerSeat Cannot Be UsedVisit WorkshopRThe front-passenger seat cannot be moved from the chauffeurmode position into the normal position. There is a malfunction.RThe front passenger head restraint is folded down and can no longerbe folded up. There is a malfunction.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. inthe event of an accident or when braking.X Do not use the front-passenger seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

nBefore oper. front-pass. seat fromrear, deactiv. over‐ride feature.

You have attempted to adjust the front-passenger seat from the rearcompartment while the override feature is activated.X Deactivate the override feature for the rear side windows(Y page 67).

X Adjust the front-passenger seat from the rear (Y page 108).

310 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

&Pre-Entry ClimateCtrl. (Via Smart‐Key) AvailableAgain After EngineStart

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:With the engine switched off, you have attempted to switch on the pre-entry climate control more than twice.X Let the engine run for ten seconds.After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is opera-tional again.

&Pre-Entry ClimateCtrl. (Via Smart‐Key) Inoperative HVBattery Low

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The on-board voltage is too low. The pre-entry climate control cannotbe switched on.X Drive for a longer distance.The battery is being charged. When the condition of charge of thehigh-voltage battery is over the specified minimum, pre-entry cli-mate control is operational again.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 357).

Display messages 311

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 82).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed in the multifunction display for amaximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

312 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, thekey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 313

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

314 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

é N PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The yellow RBS (recuperative brake system) warning lamp is on. In addition, theremay be a warning tone.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning. Pedal travel may be longer than usual and braking per-formance may be affected. The automatic engine switch-off function may also bedeactivated.X Observe the messages in the multifunction display (Y page 277).X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$ N PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The red brake system warning lamp is on. A warning tone also sounds.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning. Pedal travel may be longer than usual and braking per-formance may be affected.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 315

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. Therefore BAS(Brake Assist), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEERCONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deac-tivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

316 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS withCross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Cross-wind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind SpotAssist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$J÷!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellowESP® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine isrunning.ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD,PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, Hill StartAssist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and ActiveBlind Spot Assist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 317

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73).

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, HillStart Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

318 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.

F! NF (USA only) or! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 319

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legalrequirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legalregulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolanttemperature gauge is at the beginning of the cold range.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

320 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 356).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257 ‡(125 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-start traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 ‡ (124 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 356).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 321

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

X At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡ (125 †), you can continue driving to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-start traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 75).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 71).

322 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 189).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 367).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 390).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) flashes for approximately oneminute andthen remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 323

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Vehicle

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

324 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axle weightrating of the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.

Stowage areas 325

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 325).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

The glove box can be cooled (Y page 159).The glove box contains:Ra coin holderRa pen holderRthree credit card holdersRa holder for the multimedia system remotecontrol.

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key (Y page 81).

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise toposition1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartments in the center con-sole

X To open: briefly press marking;.X To close: push stowage compartment: inthe direction of the arrow until it engages.

326 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: or; and fold thearmrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USBport, an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface areinstalled in the stowage compartment. A MediaInterface is a universal interface for portableaudio or video equipment, e.g. for an iPod®,iPhone® or MP3 player (see the separate multi-media system operating instructions).

Stowage compartments in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled up fluores-cent jacket and a small umbrella in stowagecompartment; in the doors.In doors: you can store bottles with a capacityof up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull handle: and fold the armrests upwards.

Vehicleswith electrically adjustable outer seats:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-com-partment center console

Stowage areas 327

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rearX Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USBport, an AUX-IN jack, a mobile phone bracket ora 115 V or 230 V socket are installed in thestowage compartment.

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Vehicleswith electrically adjustable outer seats:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rear:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVDplayer is installed instead of a stowage com-partment.

Folding tableG WARNINGIf the folding table is folded out while the vehi-cle is in motion, passengers can be thrownagainst it, particularly in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or a sudden change ofdirection. There is a risk of injury.Fold the folding table away before each jour-ney.

X To fold out: open rear armrest:(Y page 327).

X Pull the folding table forwards and upwards byrecess; or= and swing outwards.

X Fold the table panels apart.X To fold in: fold the table panels together andswing in the folding table.

328 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage netsStowage nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and the front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the trunkObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 325)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 325).

Securing loads using parcel net hooks

General notesObserve the following notes on securing loads:RSecure the load using the parcel net hooks.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

Vehicles without PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Vehicles with PLUG-IN HYBRID operationThere are four parcel net hooks or two parcel nethooks (vehicles with PLUG-IN HYBRID opera-tion) in the trunk.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

X To open: open the trunk lid.X Press handle; on the ribbing downwards.Handle; folds upwards.

X Swing trunk floor: upwards using handle;until it rests against the trunk partition.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of thetrunk floor.

Stowage areas 329

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Clip hook= into groove?.X To close: unclip hook= from groove?.X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the under-side of the trunk floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 433).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse roof carriers that have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to avoid damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in such away that the vehicle will not sustain damageeven when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel fully and openthe trunk lid fully when the roof carrier isinstalled.

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,do not use metallic or hard objects to openthem.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof loadmay become detached from the vehicle. Youmust therefore ensure that you observe the roofcarrier manufacturer's installation instructions.Vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if aroof carrier is installed. The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel can still be raised toallow ventilation of the vehicle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel makes contact with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof willlower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Fold covers: upwards in the direction of thearrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchoragepoints under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot always

330 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

retain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 325).Mercedes-Maybach vehicles equipped withchampagne glasses: for your own safety, whenusing champagne glasses, please observe thefollowing:Rdo not use the champagne glasses while thevehicle is in motionRdo not use champagne glasses made ofbreakable glass, and store them in the trunk ifpossible

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 326).

X Open the protective flap if necessary.X To remove: slide catch: forwards and pullthe cup holder upwards.

X To insert: make sure that the protective flapis closed.

X Insert the cup holder and slide catch: back.You can remove the cup holder and the rubbermat for cleaning. Clean them with clean, luke-warm water only.

Cup holders in the rear seat armrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat! Close the cup holder before folding the rearseat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holdercould be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back untilit engages.

Features 331

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press down base; of the cupholder in the middle until it engages.

X To close: press closing button:.Base; of cup holder pops up.

The cup holder insert can be removed for clean-ing. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

! Please do not pull out the cup holder insertany further than 15 mm. Otherwise, thewooden trimon the rear seat armrest could bedamaged.

X To remove the insert: press downbase= ofthe cup holder in the middle until it engages.

X Press both retaining clips; and pull the cupholder insert upwards approximately 15 mm.

X Press button:.Base= of cup holder pops up.

X Remove the insert from the rear seat armrestcompletely.

! Make sure that the cup holder insert hasbeen inserted into the recess correctly. Oth-erwise, the wooden trim on the rear seat arm-rest could be damaged.

X To install the insert:make sure that base;of the cup holder is in the upper position.

X Place the cup holder insert into the recess inthe rear seat armrest such that button: isfacing forwards.

X Press the cup holder insert down.X Press outer ring= of the cup holder insert,until the cup holder insert engages audibly.

Temperature controlled cup holder inthe rear compartment

Example: Sedan: Cup holder; SwitchThe temperature-controlled cup holder can beused to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinkswarm.When you use the warming function, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. Therefore, donot touch the cup holder insert.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To switch on the cooling function: pressand hold button; until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

332 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button; until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton; until the indicator lamp on the but-ton goes out.

The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Additional sun visor= Bracket? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticketA Vanity mirrorB Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into retainer= and mirror coverB hasbeen folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of bracket=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor; to the wind-shield.

Rear side window roller sunblinds

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftThe sunblinds for the rear side windows can beoperated with the buttons for the side windows.The switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.X To close fully: pull the corresponding switchwhen the side window is closed.

X To open fully: press the correspondingswitch.

Features 333

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

i You can use the switches on the rear doorsto close the rear roller sunblinds for the oppo-site side.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening orclosing process is briefly stopped. The rollersunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can movefreely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or otherobjects could be damaged.

At temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) the rollersunblind cannot be operated.

Extending/retracting from the driver'sseat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To extendor retract: briefly press button:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Extending/retracting from the rear

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 162).

X To extend: pull switch: upwards and let go.The roller sunblind extends fully.

X To stop extending: press switch: down-wards briefly.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenretracts again.

X To retract: press switch: beyond the pointof resistance and let go.The roller sunblind retracts fully.

X To stop retracting: pull switch: upwards.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenextends again.

When the override feature for the rear side win-dows is activated (Y page 67), theu switchcannot be operated. The roller sunblind can onlybe extended and retracted from the driver'sseat.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

334 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: briefly press marking?.Stowage compartment= opens.

X To remove the insert: grip the sides ofinsert:, push it forward and pull itupwards;.

X To re-install the insert: press insert: intothe drawer until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartment=closed until it locks.

Rear-compartment ashtray

The ashtray is located in the stowage compart-ment in the rear door. To use it, you can place itin a cup holder or hold it in your hand.X Remove the ashtray from retainer: in therear door.

X To open: fold lid; upwards.X To close: press lid; downwards.If you are not using the ashtray, close it andplace it in the retainer in the rear door.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment; opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartment;closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter in the rear compart-ment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Features 335

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicleswithout a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-temX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: Sedan

X Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment: opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: press stowage compartment:closed until it locks.

336 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the rear compartment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Vehicleswithout a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-temX To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.On vehicles with a 115 V socket, there is no 12 Vsocket in the center console in the rear com-partment.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: SedanX Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Features 337

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,must notconsume more than a maximum of 150 wattsaltogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has asuitable connector and conforms to stand-ards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-sible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the center console in thefront compartment (Y page 336) and in thetrunk are functional (Y page 337).

Using the 115 V power socket

The 115 V socket is in the center console in therear compartment on vehicles with a rear benchseat or electrically adjustable rear seats.X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

The 115 V socket is in the armrest on vehicleswith individual seats in the rear.X Open the armrest (Y page 327).X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

338 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The warning lamp on the115 V power socket isnot lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 374).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominalpower of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Coolbox in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire.Always make sure that the ventilation grille isnot covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in thetrunk.The coolbox can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb(3.5 kg).If you want to store a bottle in the upper com-partment of the coolbox, the capacity of thebottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).Store only plastic bottles in the upper compart-ment of the coolbox.

Using the coolbox

X Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold downthe rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Features 339

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: pull handle: on the cover.X Fold the cover out to the front.X To switch cooling level to low: press but-ton; once.An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: press but-ton; twice.Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button;repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends onthe ambient temperature and the selected cool-ing level.The coolbox reduces its cooling output orswitches off, if:Rmany electrical consumers are turned onRthe starter battery is not sufficiently chargedThis is indicated by the flashing indicator lampsin the button. The cooling function will automat-ically switch back on as soon as there is suffi-cient voltage.

Caring for the coolboxIf you do not need to use the coolbox for anextended period you should switch it off, defrostit and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid openfor a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

You can remove the coolbox for maintenancepurposes.X To remove: switch off the coolbox.X Pull plug; down and out.X Unscrew both screws=.X Pull out the coolbox.X Close flap:.X To install: swing flap: to the side until it islocked in place by the magnets.

X Insert the coolbox.X Tighten both screws=.X Connect plug;.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.

340 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume control on the multimediasystem.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe Inoperative or the Service NotActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diagno-sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 340).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

Features 341

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing the SOS button, you will not knowwhether mbrace placed the emergency call. Inthis case, always summon assistance by othermeans.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the

342 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 346).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Features 343

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

344 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:

Features 345

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle HealthCheck can be started, the Request for Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle diagnostics? message appears in thedisplay.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 162).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Active message.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 29).

346 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 26).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the External desti‐nation ICON_POI_Category Name_1 hasbeen saved to "Previous destina‐tions". Would you like to start navi‐gation? message on the multimedia systemdisplay.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Starting route guidance.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.You can find further information in the separatemultimedia system operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garage

Features 347

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 28).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 348).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-grammed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 349).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.

348 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 348).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofthe garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units which

Features 349

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

operate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from the but-ton which you are programming. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and 12 inches(5to 30 cm) or at the sameangle but at varyingdistances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the same pro-gramming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slidethe respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the corresponding frontseat forwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers; until youhear them engage.

350 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehi-cle interior frombecoming too hot. It also blocksradio waves from penetrating the windshield upinto the gigahertz range.In order to operate radio-controlled equipment,e.g. toll recording systems, areas: on thewindshield are permeable to radio waves. Youcan install radio-controlled devices in theseareas.These areas can best be seen from outside thevehicle by observing the light reflected off thewindshield.

Features 351

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

352 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.Once you have lifted the hood about15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically openedthe rest of the way and held open by the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick (except S 600 and Mercedes-AMGS 65 models)

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 353

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

354 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (S 600 andMercedes-AMGS65models)X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Use: or9 to select the Engine Oil Level submenu.X Pressa to confirm the selection.The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Level messageappears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multi-function display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 Liter)The oil level is too low.X Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine OilLevelThe engine oil level is too high.X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilLevel Ignition MustBe OnThe ignition is switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Need More Time toCheck Engine OilLevelThe required waiting period was not observed.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the meas-urement after about five minutes.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement afterapproximately 30 minutes.

Engine Oil LevelNot Measurable withEngine RunningThe engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about fiveminutes before carrying out the measurement.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 355

Maintenance

andcare

Z

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 353).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 429).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

356 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

orX Press Start/Stop button twice (Y page 162).X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 162)in the ignition lock.

orX Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 162).

X Slowly turn cap: counter-clockwise and torelieve excess pressure.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

Vehicles with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation: thesecond coolant expansion tank must not be fil-led.For further information on coolant, see(Y page 431).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Place cap: on the edge of the filler neck andengage in place.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appearsin the multifunction display prompting you toadd washer fluid (Y page 311).Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 431).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

ASSYST PLUS 357

Maintenance

andcare

Z

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 353).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in XX DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by XX DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch the ignition on.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu and confirm witha.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-firm witha.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

358 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (theOFF button has been pressed).Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in neutral position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehiclemay otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's doorwhen the engine is switched off or at verylow speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-sion position D or R the automatic trans-mission will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmissionwill automatically switch to park position Pand block the wheels.

Care 359

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in positionN neu-tral:Operating with the SmartKey:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Engage park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 162).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.

X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

360 CareMaintenance

andcare

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,mottled areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoo fromthe range of approved Mercedes-Benz careproducts.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

Care 361

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield (Y page 136).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lightswith a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Information

362 CareMaintenance

andcare

about the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X To open the cover of the rear view camera:with the multimedia system activated, call upthe vehicle menu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ the con-troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select Rear View Camera: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select Open Camera Cover: turn andpress the controller.The rear view camera cover opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Toopen the cover of the360°camera:withthe multimedia system activated, call up thevehicle menu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ the con-troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select the 360° Camera: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select Open Camera Cover: turn andpress the controller.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the 360° camera: clean cameralens: with clean water and a soft cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h)or with the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock, the cover of the 360° cameracloses automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contact

Care 363

Maintenance

andcare

Z

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning Night and Day View Assist

Cleaning the camera behind the wind-shield! Never clean the camera lens.When cleaningthe field of vision of the driving systems,makesure that you do not spray glass cleaner onthe camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield infront of camera;.

Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim

Camera lens: is cleaned at regular intervals byoperating the windshield washer system.X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens: when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to

364 CareMaintenance

andcare

become porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure thatthe appearance and comfort of the covers isretained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave

Care 365

Maintenance

andcare

Z

the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

366 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor.Some tools for changing a wheel are specific tothe vehicle. For more information on which tirechanging tools are required and approved toperform awheel change on your vehicle, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire sealant filler bottle; Tire inflation compressor= Towing eye

X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 329).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 369).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

: Tire sealant filler bottle; Jack= Ratchet? Alignment boltA Jacking supportB SocketC Lug wrenchD Towing eyeE Folding wheel chockF Tire inflation compressorThe tire-change tool kit is in a tray in the stowagewell under the trunk floor.X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 329).i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Rtires with run-flat characteristics(MOExtended tires) (Y page 368)Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 367)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

Flat tire 367

Breakdow

nassistance

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 405).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 189).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 162).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 164).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 400).

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 306).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fullyladen it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tire).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

368 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

Flat tire 369

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

compressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 367).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with the cable and hoseAout of the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 336) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 162).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 371).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 370).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

370 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release buttonEnext to pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Flat tire 371

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery – important safety notesPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped with a12 V battery and a high-voltage battery. The fol-lowing notes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes onthe high-voltage battery can be obtained in the"High-voltage battery – important safety notes"section (Y page 374).Special tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with

372 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Immediately rinse electrolyte or acidsplashes off with clean water. Con-tact a physician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.

Battery (vehicle) 373

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the batterycharge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery canalso supply the 12 V battery. This only happensif the condition of charge of the 12 V batteryrequires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-ers for an extended period with the engineswitched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-uously monitored this can also be performedwhen the engine is switched off. The condition ofcharge of the 12 V battery and the on-boardvoltage are thereby kept stable for a longerperiod.

High-voltage battery – importantsafety notesOnly PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equippedwith a high-voltage battery.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehiclestanding idle for lengthy periods can damagethe high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idlefor lengthy periods leave the high-voltage bat-tery connected to a charging station.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ifyou wish to leave your vehicle parked for a longperiod of time.

Charging the 12 V batteryMercedes-AMG vehicles:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.4 V.

All other vehicles:

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-

374 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 376).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 376).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:if the indicator/warning lamps in the instrumentcluster do not light up at low temperatures, it isvery likely that the discharged battery has fro-zen. In this case you may neither jump-start thevehicle nor charge the battery. The service life ofa thawed-out battery may be shorter. The start-ing characteristics can be impaired, particularlyat low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-AMGvehicles: at low temperatures,do not charge a batterywhich has been removedusing a battery charger. Allow the battery towarm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise,the service life can be shortened and the start-ing characteristics impaired, especially at lowtemperatures.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the batterycharge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery canalso supply the 12 V battery. This only happens

if the condition of charge of the 12 V batteryrequires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-ers for an extended period with the engineswitched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-uously monitored this can also be performedwhen the engine is switched off. The condition ofcharge of the 12 V battery and the on-boardvoltage are thereby kept stable for a longerperiod.

Battery (vehicle) 375

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge thebattery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.All vehicles:

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

376 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RAll vehicles exceptMercedes-AMGvehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Letthe battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 162).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Example: ground point coverX Turn fasteners: oneÕ turn and remove.X Remove the cover while pressing down on cap; of the washer fluid reservoir.

Jump-starting 377

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Position numberD identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide coverC of positive terminal= in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal= on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryD using thejumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal= on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryD to ground pointB of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryD first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointB and negative terminalA, then from pos-itive clamp= and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X After removing the jumper cables, close coverC of positive terminal=.X Replace the earth point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned preciselybeneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press fasteners: into the mountings. Turn the fasteners byÕ of a turn to engage.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use theelectric drive for approximately 30 minutes.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

378 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 426).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or theHOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automaticallyin certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towingeye only. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbecome damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-poses as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N anddo not open the driver's or front passenger'sdoor during towing. The automatic transmis-sion may otherwise shift to position P, whichcould damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.If the automatic transmission cannot be shiftedto position N, have the vehicle transported on atransporter or trailer.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 87). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

Towing and tow-starting 379

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles may not be towedaway but must instead be transported, if:Rthe multifunction display is not working orRtheá Towing Not Permitted SeeOperator's Manualmessage appears in themultifunction display.

If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can betowed out of that area with both axles on theground. In this case, the towing distance mustnot be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must notexceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). Forlonger distances, have the vehicle loaded andtransported.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rear andat the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit/stowage tray (Y page 367).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and press untilit engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 379).The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-sion stays in positionNwhen towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X You must use the SmartKey instead of theStart/Stop button (Y page 162).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 132).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resettingthe combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

380 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Transporting the vehicle

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehiclesTransportation of the vehicle should only be car-ried out by professional recovery companies.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded upand transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle isdamaged, have the vehicle transported on atruck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical sys-tem: if the battery is defective, the automatictransmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shiftthe automatic transmission to position N, youmust provide power to the vehicle's electricalsystem in the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 376).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

i Information on "Jump-starting"(Y page 376).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in thetrunk (Y page 381).

Fuses 381

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 162).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 162).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 189).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.

382 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

X Open the hood (Y page 352).X To open: release retaining clamps: andremove cover;.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X Undo screws= on the fuse box.X Remove fuse box cover? forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-rectly in cover?.

X Insert cover? at the rear of the fuse box intothe retainer.

X Fold down cover? of the fuse box andtighten screws=.

X Insert cover; and secure with retainingclamps:.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

Fuse box cover (example: Mercedes‑Maybach)X Open the trunk lid.X Prise open cover: with a flat object at thetop right and top left-hand side.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box. You can findthe corresponding fuse rating and fuse typeon the fuse allocation chart.

Fuses 383

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the sizes and types ofwheels andtires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 410).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar (Y page 394)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 189)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 387)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

384 OperationWheelsandtires

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 385). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 387).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 368).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.

Operation 385

Wheelsandtires

Z

RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitorand on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 368).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 405).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 390).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 392).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.

386 Winter operationWheelsandtires

To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 410).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 31 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 212) orMagic Body Control (MBC) (Y page 210), youmust drive at raised vehicle level if snowchains have been mounted.RWhen snow chains are installed, never useActive Parking Assist (Y page 216).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed (Y page 74).You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 387

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 394).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 400).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

388 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap(Y page 189)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Tire pressure 389

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 387).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 387).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar (Y page 394)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 189)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto thevalve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 387).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 392).

390 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 387). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 392). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 387).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observe

Tire pressure 391

Wheelsandtires

Z

the information on display messages(Y page 306).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 162).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activemessage is shown instead of the tire pressuredisplay. The tire pressures are already beingmonitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 306).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 387).You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 387).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

392 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure for each wheel orthe Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes messagewill be displayed in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressureloss warning system monitors the set tire pres-sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.This enables the system to detect significantpressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation ofa wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,a corresponding warningmessage will appear inthe multifunction display.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarningby the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears inthe Service menu of the multifunction display.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 394).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 387).The tire pressure loss warning does not replacethe need to regularly check the tire pressure. Aneven loss of pressure on several tires at thesame time cannot be detected by the tire pres-sure loss warning system.The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-ing at high speeds or driving with high rates ofacceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-cle or on the roof).

Tire pressure 393

Wheelsandtires

Z

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning system ifyou have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tires forthe respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side. Addition-ally, a tire pressure table is attached to thefuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warningsystem can only give reliable warnings if youhave set the correct tire pressure. If an incor-rect tire pressure is set, these incorrect val-ues will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 387).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 162).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress'OK' to Restart message appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press9 or: to select Yes.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressure losswarning system will monitor the set tire pres-sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, select Cancel by pressing9or:.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

394 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Loading the vehicle 395

Wheelsandtires

Z

able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

396 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 394).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Example 1Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 2- Rear: 3RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)- Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)- Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)- Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)- Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 1- Rear: 2RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)- Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg)- Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

Loading the vehicle 397

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example 3Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2RDistribution of the occupants:

- Front: 1RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 394).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.

398 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government test track as a tire graded100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 385). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 386).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

All about wheels and tires 399

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 403)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 402)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 402)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 390)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 403)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 400)D Load index (Y page 402)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the sizedescription, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).

400 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 394).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 402).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 402).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to theM+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 401

Wheelsandtires

Z

required speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 410).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. You will find this after the letter thatidentifies the speed rating (Y page 400).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 394).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 410).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week of

402 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked with "3208", was manufactured inweek 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

All about wheels and tires 403

Wheelsandtires

Z

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

404 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 367) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 368).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rear wheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 406).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotate every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depend-ing on the degree of tire wear. Do not change thedirection of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,restart the tire pressure loss warning system(Y page 394) or the tire pressure monitor(Y page 392).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Changing a wheel 405

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that "normal" level is selected forAIRMATIC (Y page 212) or Active Body Con-trol (ABC) (Y page 210).

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 162).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 164).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 367).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake and

406 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with AMGwheels and hub caps: thehub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you canunscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove thehub cap. Two different variants can be installed.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic hubcaps:X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure that hubcap: is in the open position. To do this, turnthe center cover counter-clockwise.

X Position hub cap: and turn the center coverclockwise until hub cap: engages physicallyand audibly.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and aluminumhub caps:X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 367).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

Changing a wheel 407

Wheelsandtires

Z

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of thejack so that the letters AUF are visible.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles withAMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-ing points on the outer sills.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: fold cover?upwards.

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA and the baseof the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until the tire is raiseda maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! Donot placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.

408 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 405).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-ble.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

Changing a wheel 409

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft(150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: insert the cover intothe outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 387).

i Vehicleswith a tire pressure control system:all mounted wheels must be equipped withfunctioning tire pressure control sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or

accessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the followingtire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 387).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summertires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 368).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

410 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

i The following pages contain information onapproved wheel rims and tire sizes for equip-ping your vehicle with winter tires. Wintertires are not available at the factory as stand-ard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessary toobtain wheel rims in the corresponding size.The size of the approved winter tires may dif-fer from the standard tires. This is dependenton the model and the equipment installed atthe factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 411

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

S 400 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 (101 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

412 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

Winter tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 413

Wheelsandtires

Z

S 550

Summer tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

414 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

Winter tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 415

Wheelsandtires

Z

S 550 e

Summer tiresR18

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/50 R18 100 W3

RA: 275/45 R18 103 W2, 3FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

416 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

Winter tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

S 550 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 417

Wheelsandtires

Z

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

418 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

Winter tiresR18

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

S 600

Summer tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 419

Wheelsandtires

Z

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

All-weather tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

Winter tiresR19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)5

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

420 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Mercedes-Maybach S 600

Summer tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

All-weather tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

Winter tiresR19

Tires Wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 Not in conjunction with AMG line (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 421

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mercedes‑AMG S 63 4MATIC

Summer tiresR19

Tires Wheels

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL6

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 6FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL6

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 6FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

R20

Tires Wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tiresR19

Tires Wheels

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

6 Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

422 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R20

Tires Wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Mercedes‑AMG S 65

Summer tiresR20

Tires Wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tiresR20

Tires Wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 423

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires Wheels

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

424 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Useful information

i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 28).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissibleoutput in these wavebands is required.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions (example:Mercedes‑Maybach): Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender? Trunk lid

i On vehicles with panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to thefront or rear roof area is not permitted.On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of the vehicleclosest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket

Vehicle electronics 425

Technicaldata

Z

radio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe themanufacturer's addi-tional instructions when installing.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-Benz.Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 78 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following wave-bands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

Location of vehicle identification plate (exam-ple, left-hand-drive vehicle)X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

426 Identification platesTechnicaldata

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviatefrom the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 427)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 426)

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommended byMercedes-Benz. Damagewhich is caused by theuse of products which have not been recom-mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benzwarranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed inthis Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in theappropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Service products and filling capacities 427

Technicaldata

Z

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacityMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Total capacity

S 400 4MATIC

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles

16.6 US gal(63.0 l)

All other models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

S 400 4MATIC

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to enginefailure.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)

428 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI.Information on refueling .

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.

The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue could buildup in the injection system as a result. In suchcases, and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may bemixed with the cleaning additive recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 427).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Service products and filling capacities 429

Technicaldata

Z

Model MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

S 400 4MATIC

S 550 e 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

S 600Mercedes‑May-bach S 600Mercedes‑AMGS 65

11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

Mercedes‑AMGS 63 4MATIC

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of afluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, thismeans that it is thick; a low viscosity means thatit is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you which SAEclassifications are to be used. The low-temper-ature characteristics of engine oils can deterio-rate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, sootand fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly rec-ommended that you carry out regular oilchanges using an approved engine oil with theappropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 427).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

430 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewithMB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

S 400 4MATIC

S 550 e 13.3 US qt (12.6 l)

S 600Mercedes‑May-bach S 600

15.7 US qt (14.9 l)

Mercedes‑AMGS 63 4MATIC

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Mercedes‑AMGS 65

11.3 US qt (10.7 l)

All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. The

Service products and filling capacities 431

Technicaldata

Z

spray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant orreplacing components, may only be carried outby a qualified specialist workshop. All applicableregulations, as well as SAE standard J639, mustbe adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

S 550 eMercedes‑AMG vehicles

25.0 ± 0.4 oz(710 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

S 550 eMercedes‑AMG vehicles

4.3 oz(120 g)

Vehicles without rear-com-partment air-conditioningsystem

Capacity

Refrigerant 23.3 ± 0.4 oz(660 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 3.9 oz(110 g)

432 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Vehicles with rear-com-partment air-conditioningsystem

Capacity

Refrigerant 27.1 ± 0.4 oz(770 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Trunk lid opening dimensions (example:Mercedes‑Maybach)Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model : Opening height

S 400 4MATICS 550 4MATIC

S 550 71.0 in(1803 mm)

Model : Opening height

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

71.2 in(1808 mm)

All other models 71.1 in(1806 mm)

S-Class with a short wheelbase

All models

Vehicle length 201.4 in (5116 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1499 mm)

Wheelbase 119.5 in (3035 mm)

Turning radius 39.0 ft (11.90 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

S-Class with a long wheelbaseMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

S 400 4MATIC

Vehicle length

Vehicle height

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

Wheelbase

Turning radius

Maximum roof load

Maximum trunkload

Vehicle data 433

Technicaldata

Z

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Vehicle length 208.1 in (5287 mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1499 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 124.6 in (3165 mm)

Turning circle,Mercedes-AMGS634MATIC

41.0 ft (12.50 m)

Turning circle,Mercedes‑AMG S 65

40.4 ft (12.30 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 206.5 in (5246 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 124.6 in (3165 mm)

Turning radius 40.4 ft (12.30 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle height

S 550 58.8 in (1494 mm)

S 550 4MATIC

S 550 eS 600

58.9 in (1497 mm)

High-voltage battery(S 550 e)

Model Lithium-ion

Energy content

High-voltage battery(S 550 e)

Nominal capacity

Range in electric-onlymode (according to NEDC)

Charging time at 16 A(using a charging stationor wallbox)

Charging time at 8 A (usinga mains socket)

Mercedes‑Maybach

All models

Vehicle length 214.7 in (5453 mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1498 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 132.5 in (3365 mm)

Turning radius 42.3 ft (12.90 m)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

434 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

435

436